Home / US Congress / CON-feb5e303

US Congress

Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance

Date
7 April 2003
Category
US Congress
Text available
English
Source
Congressional Research Service (EveryCRSReport)
English original PDFDownload English text
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Updated February 23, 2004 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Summary Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow and capture of Saddam Hussein, but replacing that regime with a stable, moderate, democratic political structure has run into difficulty. Past U.S. efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has complicated U.S. efforts to restore stability, accomplish economic reconstruction, and build and transfer authority to Iraqi political and security bodies. Formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person cabinet; these bodies are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political factions but not viewed widely within Iraq as effective or legitimate institutions. Recent legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) provides over $18.7 billion in supplemental FY2004 funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq (and Afghanistan). See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Iraq Liberation Act and Clinton Administration Relations With the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Continued Doubts About Opposition Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Adnan Pachachi/Iraqi Independent Democrats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Iraqi Communist Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Handover of Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan . . . . . . . . . 25 Local Governance and Civil Society Promotion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 With Signs of Progress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 The Capture of Saddam Hussein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Faction-Based Militias/Domestic Intelligence Apparatus . . . . . . . . . . 34 Internationalization/U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Restarting Iraq’s Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 CPA Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Funds Available/FY2005 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Easing of U.S. Sanctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Debt Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance The United States did not remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power in the course of the 1991 Persian Gulf war, and his regime, contrary to U.S. expectations, survived post-war uprisings by Iraq’s Shiites and Kurds. Subsequently, the United States sought to remove Saddam from power by supporting dissidents inside Iraq, although changing Iraq’s regime was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. Saddam Hussein was captured alive on December 13, 2003. The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite dynasty during 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1 Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. He was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military officers. One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al-Salam al- Arif. In November 1963, Arif purged the Baath, including Baathist Prime Minister Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, and instituted direct military rule. Arif was killed in a helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif, who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July 1968. Following the Baath seizure, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, a military figure, returned to government as President of Iraq and Saddam Hussein, a civilian, became the second most powerful leader as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that position, Saddam developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to monitor loyalty among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the military. On July 1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq: Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003. CRS-2 17, 1979, the aging al-Bakr resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid- March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained relatively autonomous. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2 The following sections discuss organizations and personalities that were part of the U.S. effort to change Iraq’s regime during the 1990s and some that were not directly associated with those efforts but are emerging as major players in post- Saddam Iraq. 2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. CRS-3 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi After 1991, the growing exile opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old and is a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, MIT) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of embezzlement and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be favored by those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, who most supported changing Iraq’s regime by force. 3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-4 Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis who most welcomed the U.S. military removal of Saddam Hussein and who want to comprehensively purge and exclude former Baath Party members from post-Saddam governance and security institutions. On April 6, 2003, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias. Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N. General Assembly meetings that month. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of Saddam. In August 2003, the Governing Council tapped Makiya to head a 25-person committee that was to propose a process for drafting a new constitution (see below). On November 23, 2003, the Governing Council announced the appointment of a pro-INC Iraqi-American woman, Rend Rahim Francke, as representative of Iraq to the United States. Since the 1991 Gulf war, she headed an opposition group called the Iraq Foundation, which has an office in Washington and received some U.S. democratization funds since the early 1990s. She is working out of Bahrain’s embassy in Washington, at least temporarily. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the 1992 INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud CRS-5 Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Baghdad during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of whom are trained in conventional military tactics. In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May 1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994, tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces, at the KDP’s invitation, militarily helped the KDP capture PUK-held Irbil, seat of the Kurdish regional government. With U.S. mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens (75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3 million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about $4 million in DOD drawdowns (vehicles and communications gear), under Section 552 of the FAA. Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens. A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002, the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the reconciliation process. In post-Saddam Iraq, both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Talabani was Council president during November 2003. The KDP and PUK are said to be increasingly combining their political resources and efforts to re-establish the joint governance of the Kurdish regions that was in place during 1992-1994. The Kurdish parties are also negotiating with U.S. authorities to maintain substantial autonomy in northern Iraq in a sovereign, post-occupation Iraq, although clashes have flared in December 2003- January 2004 between Arabs and Kurds in the city of Kirkuk as Kurdish leaders seek to politically incorporate that city into the Kurdish regions. The resolve of the major Kurdish parties to seek full autonomy reportedly was strengthened in the wake of a February 1, 2004, twin suicide bombing in Irbil at both party headquarters; over 100 Kurds, including some senior political officials, were killed in those attacks. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. CRS-6 A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar movement was largely taken over by Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left northern Iraq for Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and was arrested again in early January 2004. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. U.S. officials have said since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent suicide bombings (see below). For more information on Ansar and alleged Iraq-Al Qaeda linkages, see CRS Report RL32217, Iraq and Al Qaeda: Allies or Not? Shiite Islamist Organizations Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-Saddam Iraq. Many U.S. officials and experts perceive these factions as aligned with Iran, while others believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not seek to model Iraq after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, who is about 75 and is based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule but is emerging as a major political as well as religious force in post-Saddam Iraq. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al- Ilmiya,” a grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous assessments say many Iraqi Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements and his calls for public demonstrations. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he reportedly refuses to meet with U.S. representatives. Other senior Hawza clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, 4 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-7 Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah Bashir al-Najafi. Other major Shiite Islamist groupings, including the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI) and the Da’wa Party, are aligning themselves with Sistani in the post- Saddam power struggle. On the other hand, many Sunnis oppose Sistani, who, according to conflicting accounts, might have been a target of a failed assassination attempt on February 5, 2004. Some accounts, including from the U.S. military in southern Iraq, say there was no assassination attempt against Sistani. Sistani, who was born in Mashhad, Iran, and studied in Qom, Iran, before relocating to Najaf,5 is considered to be in the tradition of his mentor, the late Grand Ayatollah Abol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs. Sistani became head of the Hawza when Khoi died in 1992, and Sistani spent most of the 1990s lecturing and writing and trying to avoid scrutiny from Saddam Hussein’s regime. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s directive be followed. Sistani subsequently opposed the November 15, 2003, agreement on a political transition (see below), viewing that as tantamount to an appointed government, and insisted instead on a process consisting of direct elections. In January 2004, hundreds of thousands of Sistani supporters demonstrated in Baghdad and throughout southern Iraq to support his call for elections. Sistani reportedly wants Shiite Muslims to emerge dominant in Iraq, and although he might not support direct clerical participation in government, he also wants Iraq to maintain its Islamic culture and not become secular and westernized, according to press accounts. He favors modest dress for women and curbs on alcohol consumption and Western-style music and entertainment. On the other hand, his career and his statements do not suggest that he wants a strongly centralized, repressive regime that excludes Sunnis, Kurds, and other minorities from government. SCIRI/Badr Corps. One overtly political and well-established Shiite faction is the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982, composed mainly of ex-Da’wa Party members (see below), to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s long-time leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003. Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim, who had been a Da’wa Party activist before forming SCIRI, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family had fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during 5 For more information on Sistani, see Shadid, Anthony. Call of History Draws Iraqi Cleric to the Political Fore. Washington Post, February 1, 2004. CRS-8 a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf. His younger brother, Abd al-Aziz, has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi. Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni Arab factions and most Kurdish parties. In post-Saddam Iraq, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts to establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which Shiites are adequately represented. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S. officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. (He headed the Council during December 2003.) At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid restoration of Iraqi sovereignty and has said it does not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic. Nonetheless, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s goals and its ties to Iran. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Brigade operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Badr Brigade fighters have deployed in Najaf and other southern cities since the bombing. A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra. CRS-9 Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI and Sistani. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved into Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of Iraq’s Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa. In post-Saddam Iraq, Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post- August 2003.) The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance; Fadlallah also reportedly perceives himself a rival of Sistani as a pre-eminent Shiite authority figure. The linkages between Iraqi and Lebanese Shiites could explain reports that security personnel and other activists from Lebanese Hizballah have entered Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein, although other explanations include an effort by Iran to work through Lebanese Hizballah to build leverage in southern Iraq.6 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.7 Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers 6 Risen, James. “Hezbollah, in Iraq, Refrains from Attacks on Americans.” New York Times, November 24, 2003. 7 See also White, Jeffrey. “To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States.” Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003. CRS-10 currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a separate movement. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 30 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. Moqtada has also been highly critical of Sistani, possibly because his father, Mohammad Sadiq Al Sadr, had been a rival of Sistani for pre-eminent Shiite religious authority in Iraq. The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction in opposing the occupation.8 If true, this could represent the emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf. Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S. commanders have debated how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October 2003. Another possible explanation for his apparent moderation is that Moqtada might be trying to position his movement for involvement in the transition regime that is to replace the Governing Council; his involvement would probably require the acquiescence of U.S. authorities in Iraq. 8 Shadid, Anthony. “Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance.” Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-11 Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s. Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups Differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. intervention, had it received more U.S. funding and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).9 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party, military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad al-Alawi, himself a former Baathist who fell out with Saddam Hussein in the 1960s and went to Europe. He became a physican and was president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. 9 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-12 Baghdad went on the offensive against both the INA, as well as the INC, in mid- 1996, culminating with the August 1996 incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA had been rebuilt and was operating throughout Iraq. Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups. Chalabi and the INC have argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the former regime in official positions. Like the INC, the INA does not appear to have a mass following in Iraq, but it has close ties to some agencies of the U.S. government. In post-Saddam Iraq, Alawi has taken the lead in pushing for the establishment of an internal security service for post-war Iraq, dominated by the major exile factions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency; he was president in October 2003. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. CRS-13 Some of the war crimes funding went to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act and Clinton Administration Relations With the Opposition A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept, advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is removed from power. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti- Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in the eventual formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.) CRS-14 Monarchists/Sharif Ali. One of the designated groups, the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 48 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-Saddam period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003. He did not participate directly in negotiations with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. He left Iraq for London in June 2003, reportedly somewhat disillusioned at the pace of transition to Iraqi self-rule. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. The Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. (The Hurlburt trainees were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war.) Continued Doubts About Opposition Capabilities. During 1999- 2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over regime change in Iraq. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Some took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement and that direct U.S. military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until Iraq re-admitted the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million CRS-15 was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would contract.10 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a “smart sanctions” plan — modification of the U.N. sanctions regime and “oil-for-food” program to improve international enforcement of the U.N. ban on exports of weapons-related technology to Iraq. The plan offered to relax U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of purely civilian equipment.11 The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Secretary Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.12 After 10 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. 11 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy. 12 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. CRS-16 about a year of Security Council negotiations, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminated U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.13 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to withholding U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.14 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.- led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials, reportedly led by deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990 invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along 13 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 14 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-17 with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001, attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (For a discussion of this issue, see CRS Report RL32217, Iraq and Al Qaeda: Allies or Not?) WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about Iraq’s WMD: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, CRS-18 Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime, while the State Department and Central Intelligence Agency (CIA) believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, in part because of questions about the INC’s credibility in Iraq and its use of U.S. funds. At the same time, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic-based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period included the following: 1) the Iraqi National Movement, formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC) and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. Mukhlis has returned to Iraq and reportedly is active politically. 2) the Iraqi National Front, another ex-military group, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. He has been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam. CRS-19 3) the Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement, established in 1996 by ex-officer Najib al-Salhi. Salhi, who served in the Republican Guard, defected in 1995. He and his party have been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam. 4) the Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,15 although his current whereabouts are unknown; 5) the Iraqi Turkmen Front, a small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq; 6) the Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, headed by Jamil Wakil — a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi. (Shirazi is an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The group has not appeared active in Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein; and 7) the Assyrian Democratic Movement, headed by Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq, but there is a strong diaspora in the United States. The Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. As U.S. military action against Iraq approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.16 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 of them completed training at an air 15 “‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper.” Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. 16 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. CRS-20 base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.17 These recruits served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As 2002 drew to a close, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the Governing Council, as is Pachachi.) Adnan Pachachi/Iraqi Independent Democrats. Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al-Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule and heads a small party called the “Iraqi Independent Democrats.” He is one of the rotating presidents of the Governing Council and was president during January 2004. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In mid-March 2003, U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq broke down. The impasse followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al- Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under Resolution 1441, were generally critical of 17 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-21 Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up some outstanding questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the issue of Iraq’s WMD pre- and post-war, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Izzat Ibrahim al-Duri, are unknown. No WMD was used, although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether those missiles were of prohibited ranges (greater than 150 km). CRS-22 Post-Saddam Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of continued resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a post-Saddam government is stable and democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-Saddam regime. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime, the United States set up an occupation structure, a decision reportedly based on Administration concerns that immediate sovereignty for Iraq would likely result in infighting among established opposition factions. The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who served as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction and lax control of post-war Iraqi politics under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied the personnel shift indicated high-level dissatisfaction with Garner. U.S. officials refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. (Among other provisions, Resolution 1483 lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq.) Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move has been widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post-war governance. The Washington Times reported on January 6, 2004, that the military side of U.S. operations might soon change with the potential appointment of a four-star U.S. general as U.S. military commander for Iraq; current operations in Iraq are headed by a three-star officer, Lt. Gen. Ricardo Sanchez. CRS-23 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate took on increasing urgency as resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq escalated in 2003. Shortly after the regime fell, ORHA director Jay Garner began a process to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. The Administration organized a meeting in Nasiriyah (April 15, 2003) of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies; many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings and emerging political movements. SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. A follow-up meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. However, in mid- May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, ended this process. Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26 meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party (see above). The major-party grouping criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority. In June 2003, with U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the CPA began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties. Bremer said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution,18 although it would not assume sovereignty. The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping. It also contained prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. Prior to the assassination on September 20, 2003, of Council member Akila al- Hashimi (a Shiite woman and former foreign ministry official) the Council had 25 members, of which 3 were women and 13 were Shiite Muslims. Of the 12 Shiite Muslims still on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al 18 Transcript: “Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction.” Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-24 Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are secular. One Sunni Muslim Islamist was appointed — Muhsin Abdul Hamid — who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party; he does not have a clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. (Akila Hashimi’s vacant Council seat was filled on December 8 by Salama al- Khufaji, a Shiite women who is a dentist and teaches at Baghdad University.) The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S. of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni tribal member and civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known with what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned. Iraqi Communist Party. Also unclear is whether Council member Hamid al-Musa, the 61-year-old head of the Iraqi Communist Party and a Shiite Muslim, is allied with anyone else on the Council. The Iraqi Communist Party had been allied with Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party in the 1950s and 1960s but was purged and repressed by the Baathists after the party took power (for the second time) in 1968. The Communist Party has resumed open activities in post-Saddam Iraq and is said to be attracting adherents.19 It is also part of a new alliance of non-Islamic parties, which includes the KDP, PUK, and the Arab Socialist Movement. The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They include the Sadr movement; the Baath Party or other Sunni elements of the former regime; and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy. The Shiite Islamists on the Council consult with Ayatollah Sistani, but Sistani is not represented directly on the Council. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. Partly in 19 Constable, Pamela. Iraqi Communists Make a Comeback. Washington Post, January 29, 2004. CRS-25 response to their exclusion from the U.S.-supported political process, in December 2003 some Sunni Arabs formed a “shura” (consultative council) to possibly negotiate with the CPA and other factions on behalf of Sunni Arabs. However, some U.S. officials reportedly are suspicious of the new shura as a potential front for the resistance, and it is not clear to what extent the CPA might negotiate with it. In some of the above cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other cases, a faction might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation. As noted previously, in late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Party), Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Talabani (PUK), Hakim (SCIRI), Pachachi, Barzani (KDP), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist. Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003, and the Council was granted a seat at the United Nations (although not formally recognized as Iraq’s official representative body) in September 2003. Some governments in the region, including that of Iran and Turkey, have recognized the Council. The Council helped develop a plan, announced in September 2003, to open Iraq’s economy to foreign investment and its companies to foreign ownership. In early December 2003, the Council decided to expel from Iraqi territory any members of an exiled Iranian opposition group called the People’s Mojahedin, a signal of goodwill toward neighboring Iran. U.S. forces say they might expel Mojahedin activists to third countries but have said these activists will not be handed over to Iran. Cabinet. The Council has filled out a governmental structure, and on September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the 1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named, because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense. The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Handover of Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan. Press reports began to appear in late August 2003 that U.S. authorities were dissatisfied at the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were pressing it to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-making. Several Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition transferred greater authority to it.20 Friction also emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the major exile parties on the 20 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. “U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority.” New York Times, August 21, 2003. CRS-26 Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I. Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. That committee deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003, for drafting a constitution. In mid-November 2003, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow, as outlined in a reported CIA assessment,21 CPA administrator Bremer consulted with President Bush and other senior officials. The product of those meetings and meetings with the Governing Council was a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis, to be completed by June 30, 2004. On November 15, 2003, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on the following plan: ! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws,” to be completed by February 28, 2004. Versions of a draft constitution, worked up by a committee working under Governing Council member Adnan Pachachi, have been circulated. Most drafts contain provisions that are being hotly debated on the status of Islamic law, the degree of autonomy of the Kurdish regions, the role of women, and a future governing structure. Among the provisions of one draft, the interim constitution leaves open the possibility of a multi- person presidency, possibly to include one Shiite Muslim, one Sunni Muslim, and one Kurd.22 In February 2004, major Kurdish groups were said to be pushing for a high degree of autonomy in the draft, allowing the Kurds to maintain an independent militia and reserve the right to reject some laws made by Baghdad. Bremer said on February 20 that he reserved the right to reject a draft that makes Islam the main source of law, implying that such a move would deprive women of many rights. In late February 2004, several press 21 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer, November 12, 2003. 22 Interim Iraqi Constitution, January 2004 Draft, Translation and Commentary. Nathan Brown, George Washington University. CRS-27 reports said the draft constitution would likely not be completed by the February 28, 2004, target date. ! By the end of March 2004, there is to be agreement on the future relationship between a sovereign Iraqi government and U.S. forces. However, it is conceivable that a sovereign Iraqi government might want to review any agreement on U.S. forces made prior to the restoration of sovereignty. Partly for that reason, some Governing Council members reportedly want to postpone formalizing an arrangement on the future status of U.S. troops, leaving that decision to the sovereign government in power after June 30, 2004. ! the establishment of 15-person committees in each of Iraq’s 18 provinces, who will in turn select participants for broader local caucuses. The 15-person committees were to be established by January 21, 2004, but that deadline has not been met. Of the 15 in each committee, five will be appointed by the Governing Council, five by provincial councils, and five by town councils. By the end of May 2004, the caucuses are to select members of a 250-member national assembly. As discussed below, this plan to hold provincial caucuses was abandoned by the CPA in late February 2004. ! By June 30, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly of members of an executive branch, including designation of a provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to assume sovereignty that day. As of late February 2004, the CPA insists that a handover of sovereignty will take place by this date, although it is not yet determined how an interim government will be chosen. ! By March 15, 2005, elections of drafters of a permanent constitution. The elections are to be managed by the transition government. ! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a permanent government. As noted below, many Iraqis, most notably the Shiites, want elections far earlier than this. When it was announced, the November 2003 agreement attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some believed that it could lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should calm resistance. Others believe it represented a U.S. effort to draw down its presence in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual factions. When it was announced, some members of the Governing Council said that the Council should remain in existence as part of a transition government; this suggested that some Governing Council figures fear they might not be selected to be part of a new governing body under the agreed upon process. The transition process immediately ran into difficulty due in part to opposition by Grand Ayatollah Sistani. He called for direct elections for a transition regime, CRS-28 reportedly maintaining that the November 2003 roadmap is tantamount to an appointive process. In part to address his concerns, the CPA invited the United Nations to conduct an assessment of the feasibility of holding elections in advance of the June 30, 2004, deadline to restore sovereignty to Iraqis. A U.N. election team led by senior U.N. adviser Lakhdar Brahimi conducted its assessment during February 7-16, 2004, and met with Sistani. Based on the assessment, U.N. Secretary General Annan announced on February 18, 2004, that elections for a new government could not be completed by June 30, 2004, and he issued a report on February 23, 2004, that elections could possibly be organized by the end of 2004 or by early 2005, a time frame that appears to be somewhat at odds with Sistani’s preference that any pre-election government only be in power for a few months, at most. The CPA has asked for U.N. recommendations on how to choose an interim government that will run Iraq from June 30, 2004, until elections are held. A number of options are under consideration; among them are the following: ! Holding a traditional assembly along the lines of Afghanistan’s loya jirga, which would choose a transition government. ! Handing sovereignty to the existing Governing Council or an expanded council. Some press reports say that the Council could be expanded to 100 or more. Under some versions of this option, according to observers, the 100 or more members of the new Council might then choose a smaller executive. ! Holding provincial or town councils to elect delegates rather than select them. Local Governance and Civil Society Promotion. Although the governance transition at the national level has run into difficulty, the Administration says there has been substantial progress on democratization, particularly at the local level. Administration officials say Iraqis are freer than at any time in the past 30 years, with a free press and the ability to organize politically. Elections for some new local leaders, to replace those appointed by U.S.-led forces in the immediate aftermath of the fall of the regime, began in some towns, including Basra, in December 2003. A total of about 320 local governing councils are operating. Some Iraqi women are becoming more politically active, and among other grassroots activities, more than 700 tribal leaders formed a “farmers’ union” in January 2004. A U.S. funded “Community Action Program (CAP)” is providing local leaders with grant money for specific community projects.23 In January 2004, the Administration said it would reallocate additional funds, appropriated in the FY2004 supplemental appropriations (P.L. 108-106) for local governance and civil society promotion. As of January 2004, the Administration plans to spend $468 million for these activities. Some of these funds are going to U.S. democratization organizations, such as National Democratic Institute (NDI) and the International Republican Institute (IRI) 23 Iraqi Groups Build Democracy at Grassroots Level. Department of State Washington File, January 16, 2004. CRS-29 to do training and capacity building at the local level, as well as work with emerging and established national political organizations.24 As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.25 The State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.26 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti- corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003 because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S. casualties taken, and the slow rate of establishing a moderate and representative successor regime. At present, about 155,000 foreign troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel, about 12,000 are U.K. forces, and about 12,000 more are from a total of 31 other countries. The United States is in the process of rotating its forces and reducing them to about 110,000, and some press reports say that Defense Department officials want to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000 by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.27 U.S. forces in Baghdad are in the process of redeploying to bases around the city and turning over peacekeeping in the city itself to Iraqi security forces. The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” On the other hand, subsequent to Saddam’s capture in mid- December 2003, some U.S. commanders have said the United States has substantially reduced the number of resistance attacks (by as much as 50%) and has “turned the 24 Conversations with USAID, IRI, and others involved in U.S. democratization activities in Iraq. November 2003 - February 2004. 25 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 26 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. “Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace.” Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. 27 Ricks, Thomas. “Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04.” Washington Post, October 19, 2003. CRS-30 corner” against the resistance. Others said in January 2004 that there is progress but that defeating the resistance might still take up to a year. On average, there are about 30 attacks on U.S. forces per day, down from more than 40 per day prior to Saddam’s capture in December 2003, although the pace of U.S. casualties has not appeared to diminish since Saddam’s capture. As of February 8, 2004, about 530 U.S. forces have died in Operation Iraqi Freedom, and resistance attacks have killed about 350 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003; about 50 of those have come subsequent to Saddam’s capture. The most lethal incident, the November 15, 2003, collision of two Blackhawks killing 17 American soldiers, appeared to have been caused by some ground fire. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S. operations. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Soda Mountain (July 12-17); Ivy Serpent (July 12 - early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and Ivy Cyclone II (November 4-ongoing); Iron Hammer; and Iron Grip. Iron Hammer, which was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November 12; it has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns. Some resistance factions have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are identifying themselves with names such as: ! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be one of the largest and most active resistance group; ! Saddam’s Fedayeen, remnants of the paramilitary force that were the most tenacious of Iraqi forces during the 2003 major combat; ! Saddam’s Jihad; ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect; ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq; ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement); ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known; ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group particularly in and around Fallujah, publishing leaflets threatening Iraqis who collaborate with the U.S. occupation; ! Black Banners Group; ! Nasirite Organization; and CRS-31 ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. An apparent suicide “terrorism” dimension to the resistance began to emerge in August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N. compound, and other sites. As noted above, the February 1, 2004, bombings at Kurdish political headquarters in Irbil killed over 100. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel at which visiting deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt. The next day, there were four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad, including the headquarters of the International Committee of the Red Cross. A November 12, 2003 resistance suicide attack killed 17 Italian peacekeepers at their headquarters in Nasiriyah. The use of these tactics, which has been a hallmark of major terrorist groups such as Hamas or Al Qaeda, has prompted a debate over the role, if any, of Al Qaeda or other non-Iraqi fighters in the resistance. Some believe Iraq is becoming an arena for an Islamic “jihad” against the United States, while others believe that a foreign role in the resistance might reflect a pre- existing alliance between Baathist Iraq and Al Qaeda. For more information, see CRS Report RL32217, Iraq and Al Qaeda: Allies or Not? With Signs of Progress. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that the resistance is not derailing the U.S. mission to bring about economic reconstruction and that the insurgency can and will be defeated. Administration fact sheets and statements say that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. Electricity is nearly back to pre-war levels (4,400 Megawatts, pre- war). A new currency has been introduced and has begun circulation. Schools and hospitals have reopened throughout Iraq, and about 3 million Iraqi children have been vaccinated since Saddam fell. The Capture of Saddam Hussein. On December 13, 2003, U.S. forces captured Saddam Hussein in the town of Ad Dur, nine miles south of his hometown, Tikrit, in Iraq’s predominately Sunni tribal area north of Baghdad. Saddam, who had been hiding in a tiny cellar on a farm with $750,000 and a pistol, surrendered to soldiers of the Fourth Infantry Division without a fight. He is being held at an undisclosed location where he is being interrogated for information on the location CRS-32 of resistance leaders and members of his former regime. According to unnamed U.S. officials, Saddam has provided some information that has led to the arrests of several high-ranking ex-Iraqi officials. The Bush Administration announced that it intends to hand Hussein over to Iraqi officials to face an Iraqi-run tribunal and charges of genocide and crimes against humanity, although it has classified him as a prisoner-of- war. (For more information on options for trying Saddam Hussein, see CRS Report RS21705, Options for Trying Saddam Hussein for International Crimes.) “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the United States. As of early January 2004, about 205,000 Iraqis have been recruited to these institutions, and the goal is to have about 225,000 Iraqis serving in these institutions by mid-2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked or fought poorly in defense. Some military recruits have deserted, and some police have been absentees. On November 21, 2003, the Bush Administration issued a determination repealing a U.S. ban on arms exports to Iraq so that the United States can supply weapons to the new Iraqi security institutions. Authority to repeal this ban was requested and granted in an FY2003 emergency supplemental appropriations (P.L. 108-11) for the costs of the war. The provision (Section 1504) gives the President the authority to export to Iraq non-lethal military equipment and to export military equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military if the President determines that doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1503 requires the President to submit regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual use items to Iraq.) The following, based on a variety of press and Administration reports,28 are the pillars of the Iraqi security institutions: ! New Army. The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army following Bremer’s arrival in Baghdad. Some criticized the move as a factor that is now contributing to resistance activity, but others believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq moves toward democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a 28 Derived from DOD unclassified “draft working paper,” entitled “Iraq Status.” January 2004. CRS-33 planned 40,000 person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. The force is expected to be at or near full strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe that this is too rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all recruits. Recruits are paid $60 per month and receive nine weeks of training. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army; according to him, many soldiers of the former army are being recruited, but former members who were at the top four ranks of the Baath Party are not eligible for recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October 2003, but nearly half deserted due to low pay, according to a recent press report.29 Another 700 recruits graduated in early January 2004. The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; that level of funding is provided by the FY2004 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 108-106). ! Police. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 71,000 Iraqi policemen have been recruited, approximately the total goal for the force. The police are undergoing training in Hungary, and Jordan has begun training the first of what will be 32,000 Iraqi police to train there. Police are paid $60 per month, and must pass a background check ensuring they do not have a record of human rights violations or criminal activity. The Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950 million was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. ! Civil Defense. The paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,” deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, is assisting in maintaining order and combating insurgents. Thus far, about 16,000 have been deployed; the goal is for a total force of 40,000. Recruits are paid $50 per month and cannot have served in Iraq’s former army at a level of colonel or higher. Some units of the Corps began patrols on their own, without direct U.S. assistance, in late December 2003. ! Facilities. A separate “Facilities Protection Service” is being deployed to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and government buildings. About 98,000, more than the original goal of 50,000, have been deployed, but training is said to be minimal and some are unarmed. About 15,000 members of this force are devoted to protecting Iraq’s oil pipelines. The Administration has requested about $140 million to train and equip the Civil Defense Corps and Facilities Protection Service in the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. 29 Spolar, Christine. “Iraqi Soldiers Deserting Army.” Chicago Tribune, December 9, 2003. CRS-34 ! Border Concerns. The CPA has thus far recruited 12,000 Iraqis into a customs and border protection force, about half the goal of 25,000. Members of this force receive a few weeks of U.S. training. Faction-Based Militias/Domestic Intelligence Apparatus. The United States has also apparently agreed to allow established Iraqi factions to participate in maintaining security, hoping that Iraqis can more easily identify and root out insurgents and foreign fighters than can U.S. forces. In early December 2003, the CPA reportedly agreed to a proposal by the major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy individual militia fighters to help augment security.30 About 800 militiamen drawn from the five major parties on the Governing Council (INA, INC, SCIRI, PUK, KDP) are to work side by side with the new security institutions, particularly the Civil Defense Corps.31 Many of these party-based militiamen have substantial training and knowledge of Iraqi society, skills that could benefit efforts to maintain security. The potential risks of the plan are that the party-based militiamen would likely retain loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government. Another risk is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might erupt into internecine violence. The INA and Interior Minister Nuri Badran (INA activist) are attempting to build on the INA’s contacts among ex- Baathists and ex-military people to develop a new domestic intelligence and national police network.32 Recruitment of ex-regime members has reportedly raised suspicions of other Governing Council members, such as Ahmad Chalabi, who have been seeking to exclude virtually all former regime members from a role in post- Saddam Iraq. An INA-led intelligence force of up to 2,000, which will have personnel from other factions, is reportedly being built with the help of U.S. intelligence; its mission will be to search out anti-U.S. insurgents.33 Some fear the new intelligence services will become instruments of political repression, much as similar bodies did under Saddam Hussein’s regime. Internationalization/U.N. Role.34 Some believe that enlisting greater international participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid recruitment of Iraqi security institutions, or other options such as increasing the number of U.S. troops in Iraq. Very few commentators or U.S. politicians advocate an immediate pullout of U.S. forces from Iraq, on the grounds that doing so could yield chaos in Iraq. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly have not wanted to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly 30 Tyler, Patrick. “Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties.” New York Times, September 20, 2003. 31 Chandrasekaran, Rajiv. “U.S. to Form Iraqi Paramilitary Force.” Washington Post, December 3, 2003. 32 Williams, Daniel. “New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq.” Washington Post, September 2, 2003. 33 Wong, Edward. “New Iraq Agency to Hunt Rebels.” New York Times, January 31, 2004. 34 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions. CRS-35 lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S. The position of U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should play a larger role in Iraq’s transition to sovereignty. As of January 2004, as the U.S. plan for transition has run into difficulty, the Administration has been shifting to give the United Nations a greater role in post-Saddam governance. As noted above, the Administration solicited U.N. participation in assessing the feasibility of holding early national elections for a transition regime. Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought some U.N. backing for its post-war efforts, particularly peacekeeping and security. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government; it also “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq,” but the resolution did not dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance. These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of several major nations, such as France, that wanted to quickly phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led governance process. The United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511 (adopted unanimously on October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force under unified command.” However, the resolution did not meet the core demands of France and did not attract new troop pledges from either France, Germany, Russia, India, or Pakistan. (France has said, as of early 2004, that it might help train new Iraqi security institutions.) During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by a U.S. military official.35 Another possibility was for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission, and Defense Secretary Rumsfeld said at a December 1, 2003, NATO meeting that the United States would welcome more NATO involvement in Iraq. (NATO currently provides some logistical support to the international forces in Iraq led by Poland.) The issue was discussed again at a NATO meeting in February 2004, although without a NATO 35 Jehl, Douglas. “U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq.” New York Times, August 28, 2003. CRS-36 commitment to expand its participation in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) Several nations have responded to U.S. requests to play a role in post-Saddam peacekeeping in Iraq. As noted above, 33 countries (in addition to the United States) are providing forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. After some earlier hesitation due to security concerns, Japan and South Korea are deploying forces to Iraq. In February 2004, Japan began deploying nearly 1,000 troops to Samawah, in southern Iraq. South Korea is sending 3,000 troops to help patrol in and around the city of Kirkuk, in the north. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey would likely use the deployment to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States that Iraqi opposition made the deployment unworkable at this time. (For a list of foreign force contributions, which includes contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report RL32105.) Restarting Iraq’s Economy One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.36 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. 36 For information on Iraq’s oil industry and its reconstruction, see CRS Report RS21626, Iraq Oil: Reserves, Production, and Potential Revenues. For information on U.S. and other funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-37 An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003 due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq was exporting over 1 million barrels per day as of early October 2003, and exports are said to be about 1.7 million barrels per day as of January 2004. Iraq’s pre-war oil export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. and Iraqi officials say they hope to reach by late 2004. The FY2004 supplemental appropriations request asked for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s infrastructure cannot currently produce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided the requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of energy products. In January 2004, the Administration said some funds for energy importation might be redirected to local governance. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. CPA Budget. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which was based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. At inception, the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI) contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction). In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’ conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminated on November 21, 2003 (see below). A World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.) CRS-38 Supplemental Funding Needs.37 Partly because oil revenues lagged behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,” in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq. The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L. 108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion): ! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions; ! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy development, including programs for women and youth, and the formation of an independent human rights commission, ! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation, ! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure, ! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems; ! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications infrastructure, ! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges, ! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and ! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector initiatives. Funds Available/FY2005. No new funds for Iraq reconstruction were requested in the Administration’s budget for FY2005, released on February 2, 2004. According to unclassified Administration working papers released on January 4, 2004, a total of $58 billion have been made available for Iraq reconstruction from all sources: international donations, U.S. appropriated funds, a balance remaining from the oil-for-food program termination (see below), assets captured in Iraq, and former regime assets held abroad and now seized. Of the amounts available, $23.5 billion in funds have been committed to specific projects, leaving about $35 billion available for further reconstruction projects. In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI), mandated by Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisory and Monitoring Board). The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank, as outlined in Resolution 1483. 37 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental funding, see CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-39 Easing of U.S. Sanctions. The Bush Administration has substantially eased U.S. sanctions on Iraq, beginning with the issuing on March 24, 2003, of Presidential Determination 2003-18. That determination asserted that providing direct assistance to Iraq is important to the national security interests of the United States, an authority provided for in Section 507 of P.L. 108-7, the consolidated appropriations for FY2003. That section bars direct assistance to Iraq as well as the other six countries on the terrorism list (Syria, Libya, Iran, Cuba, North Korea, and Sudan), beginning with a May 7, 2003, executive order that exercises the sanctions easing authorities provided to the President in Sections 1501-1504 of the FY2003 supplemental appropriations bill (P.L. 108-11). The President had requested that authority in his request to Congress for FY2003 supplemental funding to pay for the costs of the war, submitted March 25, 2003. Post-1990 Iraqi Sanctions Regulations implemented Executive Orders No. 12722 (August 2, 1990) and 12724 (August 9, 1990), issued after Iraq’s August 2, 1990, invasion of Kuwait. The executive orders imposed a ban on U.S. trade with and investment in Iraq and froze Iraq’s assets in the United States. The Iraq Sanctions Act of 1990 (Section 586 of P.L. 101-513, signed November 5, 1990) reinforced those executive orders. In the aftermath of Iraq’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, Iraq was again placed on the U.S. list of state sponsors of terrorism under Section 6(j) of the Export Administration Act (P.L. 96-72). Iraq had been removed from the list in 1982. Countries on the terrorism list are barred from receiving U.S. foreign assistance, votes in favor of international loans, and sales of munitions list items (arms and related equipment and services). Exports of dual use items (items that can have military applications) are subject to strict licensing procedures. As noted above, the FY2003 supplemental granted the President the authority to lift or render inapplicable most U.S sanctions in Iraq, authorities that were exercised in the May 7, 2003, executive order. The authority is available until September 2004, according to P.L. 108-11. The following represent the U.S. sanctions that have now been eased: ! The President’s exercise of the authorities suspends the application of the Iraq Sanctions Act (Section 586 of P.L. 101-513), mentioned above, but the provisions of the Iran-Iraq Arms Non-Proliferation Act (P.L. 102-484) remain in effect. That act imposes sanctions on persons or governments that export technology that would contribute to Iraq’s advanced conventional arms capability or weapons of mass destruction programs. ! The executive order “makes inapplicable” the sanctions imposed on Iraq as a consequence of its place on the terrorism list. ! The President has rendered inapplicable to Iraq any U.S. laws that direct the U.S. government to vote against or oppose international lending to Iraq. ! the President has rendered inapplicable to Iraq Section 307 of the Foreign Assistance Act of 1961. That provision requires cuts in U.S. CRS-40 contributions to international programs that work in Iraq (and other countries named in that section). ! Authority was requested that would enable the President to authorize the export to (post-war) Iraq dual use items or arms if the President determines that doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1504 of P.L. 108-11 gave the President the authority to export to Iraq non- lethal military equipment and to export military equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military. Section 1503 requires the President to submit regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual use items to Iraq.) Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program terminated on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the program had set priorities for about $8.2 billion in contracts, leaving about $2 billion in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already transferred to the DFI in May 2003. In anticipation of the surplus funds as the program was about to terminate, the oil-for-food program transferred $2 billion to the DFI in October and November 2003. Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials believed the program should have been extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of the program. The United States and Britain opposed another extension and, as of its termination on November 21, have taken over its functions. On November 24, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a resolution to continue its “Sanctions Committee” that has monitored the U.N. economic embargo on Iraq since 1990, but to end, subject to later review, that Committee’s mandate to monitor the U.N. embargo on arms sales to Iraq. Part of the CRS-41 Committee’s economic sanctions mandate will include ensuring that assets of the former regime remain frozen. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) Debt Relief. The Administration is attempting to relieve Iraq’s debt burden built up during the regime of Saddam Hussein. The debt is estimated to total about $116 billion, not including reparations dating to the first Persian Gulf war. On December 5, 2003, President Bush appointed former Secretary of State James Baker as an envoy to try to persuade other governments to forgive Iraq’s debt. In visits during December 2003 to countries in Europe and Asia, including France and Germany, Baker obtained pledges for reduction of a “substantial” portion (widely interpreted as about two thirds) of Iraq’s estimated $41.5 billion in debt to the “Paris Club” nations. Of the Paris Club nations, the largest Iraq debt is held by Japan, Russia, France, Germany, the United States, Italy, and Britain. Approximately $45 billion in Iraqi debt is to Middle Eastern and Persian Gulf countries, and $9 billion is held by other major countries including China. The remainder of the debt is held by private creditors. (For more information, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. (For information on the results of Iraq Survey Group activities and the debate over pre-war intelligence on Iraq WMD, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is the future trial of Saddam Hussein and his associates on charges of war crimes and crimes against humanity. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured CRS-42 or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education programs. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps CRS-43 to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months — and a CRS-44 reported one third of Members have visited Iraq since the fall of Saddam — say reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in the press.38 38 Chaddock, Gail Russell. “Trips to Iraq Reshape War Views On Hill.” Christian Science Monitor, January 6, 2004. CRS-45 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs. ESF transfers to the INC for its operations continued until August 2003.
Another version (English): 7 January 2004 — RL31339_2004-01-07.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Updated January 7, 2004 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Summary Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow and capture of Saddam Hussein, but replacing that regime with a stable, moderate, democratic political structure has run into difficulty. Past U.S. efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assemblythat unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has contributed to Administration implementation of several options, including attempts to recruit more foreign participation to post-war peacekeeping, building Iraqi institutions that can maintain security, and, as of November 2003, accelerating transfer of authorityto Iraqi political bodies. Formerlyexiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person cabinet; these bodies are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political factions but not viewed widely within Iraq as effective or legitimate institutions. Congress has passed legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) that provides supplemental FY2004 funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq (and Afghanistan). See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 14 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Roadmap to Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan . . . . . . . . . 26 Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 The Capture of Saddam Hussein . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Internationalization/U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Restarting Iraq’s Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 CPA Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 DFI Current Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Debt Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance The United States did remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power in the course of the 1991 Persian Gulf war, and his regime, contrary to U.S. expectations, survived post-war uprisings by Iraq’s Shiites and Kurds. Subsequently, the United States sought to remove Saddam from power by supporting dissidents inside Iraq, although changing Iraq’s regime was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. Saddam Hussein was captured alive on December 13, 2003. The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite dynastyduring 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1 Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. He was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military officers. One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al-Salam al- Arif. In November 1963, Arif purged the Baath, including Baathist Prime Minister Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, and instituted direct military rule. Arif was killed in a helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif, who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July 1968. Following the Baath seizure, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, a military figure, returned to government as President of Iraq and Saddam Hussein, a civilian, became the second most powerful leader as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that position, Saddam developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to monitor loyalty among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the military. On July 1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq: Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003. CRS-2 17, 1979, the aging al-Bakr resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid- March 1991. ManyShiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2 2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. CRS-3 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old and is a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, MIT) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of embezzlement and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be favored by those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, who most supported changing Iraq’s regime by force. 3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-4 Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003 to disarm independent militias. Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N. General Assembly meetings that month. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that was to propose a process for drafting a new constitution (see below). On November 23, 2003, the Governing Council announced the appointment of a pro-INC Iraqi-American woman, Rend Rahim Francke, as representative of Iraq to the United States. Since the 1991 Gulf war, she headed an opposition group called the Iraq Foundation, which has an office in Washington and received some U.S. democratization funds since the early 1990s. She is working out of Bahrain’s embassy in Washington, at least temporarily. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud CRS-5 Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May 1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994, tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces helped the KDP capture Irbil, seat of the Kurdish regional government; Iraqi forces acted at the KDP’s invitation. With U.S. mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens (75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3 million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about $4 million in DOD drawdowns for vehicles and communications gear (Section 552 of the FAA). Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens. A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002, the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the reconciliation process. In post-Saddam Iraq, both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Talabani was Council president during November 2003. The KDP and PUK are said to be increasingly combining their political resources and efforts to re-establish the joint governance of the Kurdish regions that was in place during 1992-1994. The Kurdish parties are also negotiating with U.S. authorities to maintain substantial autonomy in northern Iraq in a sovereign, post-occupation Iraq, although clashes have flared in December 2003- January 2004 between Arabs and Kurds in the city of Kirkuk as Kurdish leaders have sought to politically incorporate that city into the Kurdish regions. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian CRS-6 origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar movement was largely taken over by the Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left northern Iraq for northern Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and was arrested again in early January 2004. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials have said since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck bombings (see below). One press report quotes U.S. intelligence as assessing the number of Ansar fighters inside Iraq at 150.7 Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO). Shiite Islamist Organizations Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-Saddam Iraq. Many perceive these factions as aligned with Iran. Others 4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” New York Times, December 6, 2002. 5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. 6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. “Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq.” Washington Post, September 7, 2003. 7 Schmitt, Eric. “Cheney Theme of Qaeda Ties to Bombings in Iraq Is Questioned by Some in Administration.” New York Times, November 11, 2003. CRS-7 believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not seek to model a post-war Iraqi state after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these Shiite factions is the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003. Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf. Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni Arab factions and most Kurdish parties. In post-Saddam Iraq, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts to establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which Shiites are adequately represented. At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. After he returned to Iraq, Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim had said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian- style Islamic republic. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S. officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. (He will head the Council during December 2003.) Nonetheless, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s goals and its ties to Iran. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are CRS-8 headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al- Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi. Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Brigade operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29, 2003, bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing. A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved into Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of Iraq’s Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa. In post-Saddam Iraq, Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Ruba’i is reputed to be personally and politically close to Ayatollah Ali al-Sistani (see below). Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post-August 2003.) The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks CRS-9 on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. These linkages could explain reports that security personnel and other activists from Lebanese Hizballah have entered Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein, although other explanations include an effort by Iran to work through Lebanese Hizballah to build leverage in southern Iraq.8 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.9 Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 30 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce 8 Risen, James. “Hezbollah, in Iraq, Refrains from Attacks on Americans.” New York Times, November 24, 2003. 9 See also White, Jeffrey. “To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States.” Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003. CRS-10 the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several days of anti-U.S. demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early October 2003. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction in opposing the occupation.10 If true, this could represent the emergence of a Sunni- Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf. Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S. commanders are debating how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October 2003. Another possible explanation is that Moqtada might be trying to position his movement for involvement in the transition regime that is to replace the Governing Council; his involvement would probably require the acquiescence of U.S. authorities in Iraq. Despite his expressions of moderation, U.S. forces arrested at least one of his top aides in November 2003. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major political as well as religious force in post-Saddam Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S. occupation. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous assessments say many Iraqi Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements. Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah Bashir al-Najafi. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, to some Iraqi civil servants. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and 10 Shadid, Anthony. “Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance.” Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-11 Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s directive be followed. Sistani has indicated to other Shiite leaders and Western press organs that he does not fully support the November 15, 2003 agreement on a political transition (see below), preferring instead a process consisting of direct elections. Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s. Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).11 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party, military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad al-Alawi, former president 11 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-12 of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Baghdad’s offensive against the opposition accelerated with its August 1996 incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA was operating throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt its presence in Iraq to some extent after the June 1996 arrests. Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups. Chalabi and the INC have argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the former regime in official positions. Like the INC, the INA does not appear to have a mass following in Iraq, but it has close ties to the U.S. government and does have a constituency among pro-Western Iraqis. In post- Saddam Iraq, Alawi has also taken the lead in pushing for the establishment of an internal security service for post-war Iraq, dominated by the major exile factions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine- member rotating presidency; he was president in October 2003. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, CRS-13 signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding went to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequentlybecame a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is removed from power. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank CRS-14 Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti- Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.) Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The Movement for Constitutional Monarchy is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-Saddam period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate extensively in the negotiations with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. He left Iraq for London in June 2003, reportedly somewhat disillusioned at the pace of transition to Iraqi self-rule. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The Hurlburt trainees were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would CRS-15 not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement and that direct U.S. military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until Iraq re-admitted the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop a humanitarian aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would contract.12 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His 12 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. CRS-16 plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.13 The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.14 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.15 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to withholding U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.16 13 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy. 14 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 15 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 16 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-17 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.- led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials, reportedlyled bydeputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990 invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedlyto consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001, attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.) Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its leader, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.17 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden 17 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-18 was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. A Defense Department memo to the Senate, excerpted in the Weekly Standard (November 24, 2003, issue), purports to contain intelligence information that the Administration believes demonstrates a long-standing relationship between Iraq and Al Qaeda.18 Some outside observers express skepticism about Saddam-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about Iraq’s WMD: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, 18 Hayes, Steven. “Case Closed.” The Weekly Standard, November 24, 2003. CRS-19 Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime, while the State Department believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period included the following: 1) the Iraqi National Movement, formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC) and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. Mukhlis has returned to Iraq and reportedly is active politically. 2) the Iraqi National Front, another ex-military group, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. He has been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam. CRS-20 3) the Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement, established in 1996 by ex-officer Najib al-Salhi. Salhi, who served in the Republican Guard, defected in 1995. He and his party have been active politically in Iraq since the fall of Saddam. 4) the Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,19 although his current whereabouts are unknown; 5) the Iraqi Turkmen Front, a small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq; 6) the Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, headed by Jamil Wakil — a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi. (Shirazi is an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal); and 7) the Assyrian Democratic Movement, headed by Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq, but there is a strong diaspora in the United States. The Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.20 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, 19 “‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper.” Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. 20 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. CRS-21 according to press reports.21 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65- member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24- 27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the Governing Council, as is Pachachi.) Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al- Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule, and heads a small party called the “Iraqi Independent Democrats.” Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under 21 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-22 Resolution 1441, were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. No WMD was used, although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether those missiles were of ranges prohibited bythe United Nations (greater than 150 km). Post-Saddam Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a post-Saddam government is stable and democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq CRS-23 that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-Saddam regime. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime, the United States set up an occupation structure. The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who served as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, Resolution 1483 lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move has been widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post-war governance and reconstruction. The Washington Times reported on January 6, 2004, that the military side of U.S. operations might soon change with the potential appointment of a four- star U.S. general as U.S. military commander for Iraq; current operations in Iraq are headed by a three-star officer, Lt. Gen. Ricardo Sanchez. Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate took on increasing urgency as resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq escalated in 2003. CRS-24 Shortly after the regime fell, ORHA director Jay Garner began a process to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. The Administration organized a meeting in Nasiriyah (April 15, 2003) of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. A follow-up meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, cut this process off and abandoned public deadlines for transferring sovereignty to an Iraqi government. Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26 meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party (see above). The major-party grouping criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministryheads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution,22 although it would not assume sovereignty. The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping. It also contained prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. Prior to the assassination on September 20, 2003, of Council member Akila al- Hashimi (a Shiite woman and former foreign ministry official) the Council had 25 members, of which 3 were women and 13 were Shiite Muslims. Of the 12 Shiite Muslims still on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI(Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party(Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or Da’wa. 22 Transcript: “Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction.” Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-25 He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are secular. One Sunni Muslim Islamist was appointed — Muhsin Abdul Hamid — who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party; he does not have a clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. (Akila Hashimi’s vacant Council seat was filled on December 8 by Salama al- Khufaji, a Shiite women who is a dentist and teaches at Baghdad University.) The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S. of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni tribal member and civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known with what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned. Also unclear is whether Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They include the Sadr movement; the Baath Party or other Sunni elements of the former regime; and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy. The Shiite Islamists on the Council consult with Ayatollah Sistani, but Sistani is not represented directly on the Council. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. Partly in response to their exclusion from the U.S.-supported political process, in December some Sunni Arabs formed a “shura” (consultative council) to possibly negotiate with the CPA and other factions on behalf of Sunni Arabs. However, some U.S. officials reportedly are suspicious of the new shura as a potential front for the resistance, and it is not clear to what extent the CPA might negotiate with it. In some of the above cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other cases, a faction might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Party), Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Talabani (PUK), Hakim (SCIRI), Pachachi, Barzani (KDP), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist. Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, CRS-26 Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced, although some governments in the region, including that of Iran, have recognized the Council. The Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership. In early December 2003, the Council decided to expel from Iraqi territory any members of an exiled Iranian opposition group called the People’s Mojahedin, a signal of goodwill toward neighboring Iran. Cabinet. The Council has filled out a governmental structure, and on September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the 1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named, because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense. The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop a new domestic intelligence and national police network,23 although recruitment of such categories of Iraqis has raised suspicions of other Governing Council members, such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the former regime. Roadmap to Sovereignty/November 2003 Transition Plan. Press reports began to appear in late August 2003 that U.S. authorities were dissatisfied at the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were pressing it to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-making. Several Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.24 Friction also emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the major exile parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I. Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council 23 Williams, Daniel. “New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq.” Washington Post, September 2, 2003. 24 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. “U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority.” New York Times, August 21, 2003. CRS-27 tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. However, the committee deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003, for drafting a constitution. In mid-November, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow and resistance attacks becoming more effective, as outlined in a reported CIA assessment,25 CPA administrator Bremer flew to Washington to consult with President Bush and other members of the national security team. According to press accounts, President Bush authorized Bremer to discuss with the Governing Council a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis. On November 15, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on a plan that, according to several press reports, includes the following: ! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws,” to be completed by February 28, 2004. By the end of March 2004, there is to be agreement on the future relationship between a sovereign Iraqi government and U.S. forces. ! the establishment of 15-person committees in each of Iraq’s 18 provinces, who will in turn select participants for broader local caucuses. The 15-person committees are to be established by January 21, 2004; of the 15 in each committee, five will be appointed by the Governing Council, five by provincial councils, and five by town councils. By the end of May 2004, the caucuses are to select members of a 250-member national assembly. It is reportedly these procedures that could be modified to satisfy Ayatollah Sistani’s demands (see below) for elections; some reports say there might be a decision to allow the provincial or town councils to elect delegates rather than select them. ! By July 1, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly of members of an executive branch, including designation of a provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to assume sovereignty. According to Bremer, there is to be an agreement between the transition government and the United States on the continuation of the U.S. military presence. ! By March 15, 2005, elections of drafters of a permanent constitution. The elections are to be managed by the transition government. 25 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer, November 12, 2003. CRS-28 ! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a permanent government. The agreement has attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some believe that it will lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should calm resistance. Others believe it represents a U.S. effort to draw down its presence in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual factions. Others believe that the process outlined is relatively vague and that much infighting will result at each stage of the process, including the selection of caucus participants, the naming of assembly members, the selection of a transition government, and the naming of a leader of the transition government. Some believe the process will favor the well-organized former exile parties, although others believe the plan provides sufficient opportunity for newly enfranchised groups and individuals in Iraq to gain some say in the political transition. Some members of the Governing Council say that the Council should remain in existence as part of a transition government after that government is established; this suggests that some Governing Council figures fear they might not be selected to be part of a new governing body under the agreed upon process. As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.26 The State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.27 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economyand infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil societycapacity-building; (14) anti- corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003 because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S. casualties taken, and the slow rate at which such U.S. initiatives such as the establishment of a democratic successor regime is moving forward. At present, about 145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 16,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war 26 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 27 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. “Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace.” Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-29 peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004, and perhaps that many as late as 2006. Other reports says the Administration wants to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000 by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.28 The Capture of Saddam Hussein. On December 13, 2003, U.S. forces captured Saddam Hussein in the town of Ad Dur, nine miles south of his hometown, Tikrit, in Iraq’s predominately Sunni tribal area north of Baghdad. Saddam, who had been hiding in a tiny cellar on a farm with $750,000 and a pistol, surrendered to soldiers of the Fourth Infantry Division without a fight. He is being held at an undisclosed location where he is being interrogated for information on the location of resistance leaders and members of his former regime. According to unnamed U.S. officials, Saddam has provided some information that has led to the arrests of several high-ranking ex-Iraqi officials. The Bush Administration has announced that it intends to hand Hussein over to Iraqi officials to face an Iraqi-run tribunal and charges of genocide and crimes against humanity. In an address to the nation a day after Saddam Hussein’s arrest, President Bush cautioned Americans that Saddam’s capture does not mean the end of violence in Iraq. Saddam Hussein’s role in the Iraqi resistance movement is unclear. Some analysts believe that Hussein made general provisions for guerrilla warfare prior to the start of hostilities in March 2003 but had little direct influence over day-to-day activities of guerilla cells. Many observers have questioned what kind of impact Hussein’s arrest will have on the Iraqi resistance. Some speculate that Hussein’s arrest will motivate more Iraqis to actively oppose the U.S. occupation since some Iraqis oppose the U.S. occupation but did not want to associate themselves with Saddam Hussein. Others note that Hussein’s arrest could weaken the motivation of his former supporters to continue fighting. Finally, some analysts note that there are several strands of Iraqi resistance, one directly under the control of Hussein supporters and another, more decentralized movement, led by former Iraqi army members and Islamic fundamentalists. The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S. operations. On average, there are about 20 attacks on U.S. forces per day, down from more than 40 per day prior to Saddam’s capture. Resistance attacks have killed about 250 U.S. 28 Ricks, Thomas. “Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04.” Washington Post, October 19, 2003. CRS-30 military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003, and about 15 of those have come subsequent to Saddam’s capture. The most lethal resistance attack was the November 2 shoot- down of a U.S. Chinook helicopter, killing 15 American forces. Another incident, the November 15 collision of two Blackhawks killing 17 American soldiers might have been the result of one helicopter trying to avoid ground fire. U.S. militaryoperations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Sidewinder (June 29-July7); Soda Mountain (July12-17); IvySerpent (July 12 - early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and Ivy Cyclone II (November 4-ongoing); Iron Hammer; and Iron Grip. Iron Hammer, which was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November 12; it has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns. The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent sweep operations, although several commanders have said the foreign fighters are not a large factor in the resistance activity. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have been several deadly attacks in the Shiite south. Some U.S. military officials, including Gen. Abizaid,29 put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance has operated in relatively small cells, although some U.S. commanders believe that members of Saddam’s inner circle who are still at large might be coordinating some resistance elements. Since November 2003, U.S. commanders have said they believe the resistance is acquiring a more nationwide structure. Some resistance factions have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are identifying themselves with names such as: ! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be one of the largest and most active resistance group; ! Saddam’s Fedayeen, remnants of the paramilitaryforce that were the most tenacious of Iraqi forces during the 2003 major combat; ! Saddam’s Jihad; ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect; ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq; 29 Press briefing by Gen. Abizaid, November 13, 2003. CRS-31 ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement); ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known; ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group; ! Black Banners Group; ! Nasirite Organization; and ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. An apparent suicide “terrorism” dimension to the resistance began to emerge in August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N. compound, and other sites. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel at which visiting deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt. The next day, there were four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad, including the headquarters of the International Committee of the Red Cross. A November 12 resistance suicide attack killed 17 Italian peacekeepers at their headquarters in Nasiriyah. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that the resistance is not derailing the U.S. mission to bring about reconstruction and that the insurgency can and will be defeated. Administration fact sheets and statements say that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. Electricity is nearly back to pre- war levels (4,400 Megawatts, pre-war). A new currency has been introduced and has begun circulation. Schools and hospitals have reopened throughout Iraq, and about 3 million Iraqi children have been vaccinated since Saddam fell. Administration officials also say Iraqis are freer than at any time in the past 30 years, with a free press and the ability to organize politically. Elections for some new local leaders, to replace those appointed by U.S.-led forces in the immediate aftermath of the fall of the regime, began in some towns, including Basra, in December 2003. “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the CRS-32 Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the United States. As of late December, about 130,000 Iraqis have been recruited to these institutions, and the goal is to have about 220,000 Iraqis serving in these institutions by 2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked or fought poorly in defense. Some military recruits have deserted, and some police have been absentees. On November 21, 2003, the Bush Administration issued a determination repealing a U.S. ban on arms exports to Iraq so that the United States can supply weapons to the new Iraqi security institutions. Authority to repeal this ban was requested and granted in an FY2003 emergency supplemental appropriations (P.L. 108-11) for the costs of the war. The provision (Section 1504) gives the President the authority to export to Iraq non-lethal military equipment and to export military equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military if the President determines that doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1503 requires the President to submit regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual use items to Iraq.) A related issue is the apparent U.S. agreement in early December 2003 to a proposal by the major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy their individual militia fighters to help augment security.30 About 800 militiamen drawn from the five major parties on the Governing Council (INA, INC, SCIRI, PUK, KDP) are to work side by side with the new security institutions, particularly the Civil Defense Corps.31 Manyof these party-based militiamen have substantial training and knowledge of Iraqi society, skills that could benefit efforts to maintain security. The potential risks of the plan are that the party-based militias would likely retain loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government. Another risk is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might erupt into internecine violence. The following, based on a variety of press reports, are the pillars of the Iraqi security institutions: ! New Army. The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army following Bremer’s arrival in Baghdad. Some criticized the move as a factor that is now contributing to resistance activity, but others 30 Tyler, Patrick. “Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties.” New York Times, September 20, 2003. 31 Chandrasekaran, Rajiv. “U.S. to Form Iraqi Paramilitary Force.” Washington Post, December 3, 2003. CRS-33 believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq moves toward democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000 person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. The force is expected to be at or near full strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe that this is too rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all recruits. Recruits are paid $60 per month and receive nine weeks of training. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army; according to him, many soldiers of the former army are being recruited, but former members who were at the top four ranks of the Baath Party are not eligible for recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October 2003, but nearly half deserted due to low pay, according to a recent press report.32 Another 700 recruits graduated in earlyJanuary2004. The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; that level of funding is provided bythe FY2004 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 108-106). ! Police. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 62,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, near the total goal of about 85,000. The police are undergoing training in Hungary, and Jordan has begun training the first of what will be 32,000 Iraqi police to train there. Police are paid $60 per month, and must pass a background check ensuring they do not have a record of human rights violations or criminal activity. The Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950 million was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. ! The CPA has is also building a paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,” deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, to assist in maintaining order and combating insurgents. As of December 2003, about 8,500 have been deployed; the goal is for a Corps of 40,000. Recruits are paid $50 per month and cannot have served in Iraq’s former army at a level of colonel or higher. Some units of the Corps began patrols on their own, without direct U.S. assistance, in late December 2003. ! A separate “Facilities Protection Service” is being deployed to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricitysubstations, and government buildings. About 48,000 (near the goal) have been deployed, but training is said to be minimal and some are unarmed. The Administration has requested about $140 million to train and equip the Civil Defense Corps and Facilities Protection Service in the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. 32 Spolar, Christine. “Iraqi Soldiers Deserting Army.” Chicago Tribune, December 9, 2003. CRS-34 ! The CPA has thus far recruited 12,000 Iraqis into a customs and border protection force. Members of this force receive a few weeks of U.S. training. Internationalization/U.N. Role.33 Some believe that enlisting greater international participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid recruitment of Iraqi security institutions, or other options such as increasing the number of U.S. troops in Iraq. Very few commentators or U.S. politicians advocate an immediate pullout of U.S. forces from Iraq on the grounds that doing so could yield chaos in Iraq. At times over the past six months, it appeared that the Administration had decided or was about to decide on a strategy of greater international participation in post-Saddam security, although it appears the Administration is still de-emphasizing this option. Thus far, 29 countries (in addition to the United States and Britain) have committed forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. About 30,000 non-U.S. troops are or will soon be on the ground in Iraq (including 12,000 British). Confirmed force pledges include those in Table 1, below. For a more thorough list, which includes contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report RL32105. After some earlier hesitation due to security concerns, Japan and South Korea, are deploying forces to Iraq. In November, Japan formally approved a deployment of nearly 1,000 troops in a non-combat role on December 10. South Korea is sending 3,000 troops to help patrol in and around the city of Kirkuk, in the north. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey would likely use the deployment to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States that Iraqi opposition made the deployment unworkable at this time. Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The SecretaryGeneral subsequently(May27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. 33 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions. CRS-35 Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq ; Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. These resolutions did not satisfythe requirements of several major nations, such as France, that want to phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led governance process. The United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511 (adopted unanimously on October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force under unified command.” However, the resolution did not meet the core demands of France and did not attract new troop pledges from either France, Germany, Russia, India, or Pakistan. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly have not wanted to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S. The position of U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should play a larger role in Iraq’s transition to sovereignty. On the other hand, suggesting that the Administration is revisiting its former stance to keep U.N. involvement circumscribed, Secretary of State Powell said in November 2003 that the United States might seek formal U.N. backing for the November 15, 2003, transition governance plan (see above). The move reportedly would also include giving the United Nations a major role in assisting the transition and recognizing the sovereign transition government. During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by a U.S. military official.34 Another possibility was for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission, and Defense Secretary Rumsfeld said at a December 1, 2003, NATO meeting that the United States would welcome more NATO involvement in Iraq. (NATO currently provides some logistical support to the international forces in Iraq led by Poland.) On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) 34 Jehl, Douglas. “U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq.” New York Times, August 28, 2003. CRS-36 Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges Albania 70 Armenia 13 Australia 850 Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 Estonia 47 Georgia 70 Honduras 370 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 Japan 1,000 Kazakhstan 27 Latvia 150 Lithuania 130 Macedonia 38 Mongolia 180 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 230 Norway 150 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 734 Singapore 192 Slovakia 85 South Korea 3,000 Spain 1,300 Thailand 443 Ukraine 1,650 Total (non-U.S., non- U.K.) Pledged 19,279 CRS-37 Restarting Iraq’s Economy One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.35 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003 due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al- Ulum, said Iraq was exporting over 1 million barrels per day as of early October, and exports are said to be about 1.5 million barrels per day as of late November. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. and Iraqi officials say they hope to reach in the first quarter of 2004. The FY2004 supplemental appropriations request asked for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s infrastructure cannot currently produce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided the requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of energy products. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. CPA Budget. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the 35 For information on Iraq’s oil industry and its reconstruction, see CRS Report RS21626, Iraq Oil: Reserves, Production, and Potential Revenues. For information on U.S. and other funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-38 approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. At inception, the DFI Iraq contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction). In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’ conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminated on November 21, 2003 (see below). A World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.) Supplemental Funding Needs.36 Partly because oil revenues have lagged behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,” in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq. The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L. 108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion): ! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions; ! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy development, including programs for women and youth, and the formation of an independent human rights commission, ! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation, ! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure, ! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems; ! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications infrastructure, ! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges, ! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and 36 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-39 ! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector initiatives. DFI Current Balance. As of December 3, 2003, and prior to transfers of monies appropriated by the supplemental (P.L. 108-106), the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI), set up by Resolution 1483, had a balance of $4.98 billion. (During October and November, an additional $2 billion was transferred to the DFI from the oil-for-food escrow account.) In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the DFI, mandated by Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisoryand Monitoring Board). The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank, as outlined in Resolution 1483. Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program terminated on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the program had set priorities for about $8.2 billion in contracts, leaving about $2 billion in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already transferred to the DFI in May 2003. In anticipation of the surplus funds as the program was about to terminate, the oil-for-food program transferred $2 billion to the DFI in October and November 2003. Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials believed the program should have been extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of the program. The United States and Britain opposed another extension and, as of its termination on November 21, have taken over its functions. On November 24, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil adopted a resolution to continue its “Sanctions Committee” that has CRS-40 monitored the U.N. economic embargo on Iraq since 1990, but to end, subject to later review, that Committee’s mandate to monitor the U.N. embargo on arms sales to Iraq. Part of the Committee’s economic sanctions mandate will include ensuring that assets of the former regime remain frozen. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) Debt Relief. The Administration is attempting to relieve Iraq’s debt burden built up during the regime of Saddam Hussein. The debt is estimated to total about $116 billion, not including reparations dating to the first Persian Gulf war. On December 5, 2003, President Bush appointed former Secretary of State James Baker as an envoy to try to persuade other governments to forgive Iraq’s debt. In visits during December 2003 to countries in Europe and Asia, including France and Germany, Baker obtained pledges for reduction of a “substantial” portion (widely interpreted as about two thirds) of Iraq’s estimated $41.5 billion in debt to the “Paris Club” nations. Of the Paris Club nations, the largest Iraq debt is held by Japan, Russia, France, Germany, the United States, Italy, and Britain. Approximately $45 billion in Iraqi debt is to Middle Eastern and Persian Gulf countries, and $9 billion is held by other major countries including China. The remainder of the debt is held by private creditors. (For more information, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an interim report on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group had not found actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens of WMD-related program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq concealed from the United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”37 The Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600 million to fund the Survey Group for another six months, and about $300 million has been spent on the search as of early October 2003.38 Kay reportedly has told Administration officials he is leaving before the Survey Group’s work is completed, possibly by February 2004; the resignation came amid reports that some Survey Group staff has been diverted from the WMD search to gathering information on Iraqi insurgents. Thus far, the Survey Group has found over 500 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents 37 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003. 38 “Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions.” USA Today, October 8, 2003. CRS-41 of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is the future trial of Saddam Hussein and his associates on charges of war crimes and crimes against humanity. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). According to Iraqi political leaders, an Iraqi-run tribunal could begin proceedings against former president Saddam Hussein on charges of genocide and crimes against humanity in the spring of 2004. Possible charges against Hussein include the use of chemical weapons against ethnic Kurds in 1988, the execution of prominent Shiite Muslim clerics, and the killing of hundreds of Sunni Muslim tribesmen after a coup attempt. Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the CRS-42 arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education programs. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and CRS-43 other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months — and a reported one third of Members have visited Iraq since the fall of Saddam — say reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in the press.39 39 Chaddock, Gail Russell. “Trips to Iraq Reshape War Views On Hill.” Christian Science Monitor, January 6, 2004. CRS-44 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs. ESF transfers to the INC for its operations continued until August 2003.
Another version (English): 25 November 2003 — RL31339_2003-11-25.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Updated November 25, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Summary Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow of Saddam Hussein, but replacing that regime with a stable, moderate, democratic political structure has run into substantial difficulty. Past U.S. efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assemblythat unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has contributed to Administration implementation of several options, including attempts to recruit more foreign participation to post-war peacekeeping, building Iraqi institutions that can maintain security, and, as of November 2003, accelerating transfer of authorityto Iraqi political bodies. Formerlyexiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person cabinet; these bodies are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political factions, but they have not established themselves as effective institutions. Congress has passed legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) that provides supplemental FY2004 funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq (and Afghanistan). See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 14 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Debate Over Council Authority/November 2003 Transition Plan . . . . 26 Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Internationalization/U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance The United States sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite dynastyduring 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1 Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. He was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military officers. One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al-Salam al- Arif. In November 1963, Arif purged the Baath, including Baathist Prime Minister Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, and instituted direct military rule. Arif was killed in a helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif, who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July 1968. Following the Baath seizure, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, a military figure, returned to government as President of Iraq and Saddam Hussein, a civilian, became the second most powerful leader as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that position, Saddam developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to monitor loyalty among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the military. On July 17, 1979, the aging al-Bakr resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq. 1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq: Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003. CRS-2 Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid- March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2 2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. CRS-3 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (Massachusetts Institute of Technology, MIT) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of embezzlement and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be favored by those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, who most supported changing Iraq’s regime by force. 3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-4 Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003 to disarm independent militias. Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N. General Assembly meetings that month. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that was to propose a process for drafting a new constitution (see below). On November 23, 2003, the Governing Council announced the appointment of a pro-INC Iraqi-American woman, Rend Rahim Francke, as “Ambassador” to the United States. Since the 1991 Gulf war, she headed an opposition group called the Iraq Foundation, which has an office in Washington and received some U.S. democratization funds since the early1990s. She will work out of Bahrain’s embassy in Washington, at least temporarily. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud CRS-5 Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May 1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994, tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces helped the KDP capture Irbil, seat of the Kurdish regional government; Iraqi forces acted at the KDP’s invitation. With U.S. mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens (75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3 million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about $4 million in DOD drawdowns for vehicles and communications gear (Section 552 of the FAA). Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens. A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002, the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the reconciliation process. In post-Saddam Iraq, both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Talabani was Council president during November 2003. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town CRS-6 of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar movement was largely taken over by the Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left northern Iraq for northern Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and now lives there under varying degrees of official restriction. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials have said since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck bombings (see below). One press report quotes U.S. intelligence as assessing the number of Ansar fighters inside Iraq at 150.7 Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO). Shiite Islamist Organizations Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-Saddam Iraq. Many perceive these factions as aligned with Iran. Others believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not seek to model a post-war Iraqi state after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. 4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” New York Times, December 6, 2002. 5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. 6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post, September 7, 2003. 7 Schmitt, Eric. Cheney Theme of Qaeda Ties to Bombings in Iraq Is Questioned by Some in Administration. New York Times, November 11, 2003. CRS-7 SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these Shiite factions is the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003. Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf. Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni Arab factions and most Kurdish parties. In post-Saddam Iraq, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts to establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which Shiites are adequately represented. At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. After he returned to Iraq, Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim had said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian- style Islamic republic. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S. officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. (He will head the Council during December 2003.) Nonetheless, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s goals and its ties to Iran. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al- Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi. CRS-8 Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29, 2003, bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing. A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved into Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of Iraq’s Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa. In post-Saddam Iraq, Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post - August 2003.) The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah CRS-9 Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. These linkages could explain reports that security personnel and other activists from Lebanese Hizballah have entered Iraq since the fall of Saddam Hussein, although other explanations include an effort by Iran to work through Lebanese Hizballah to build leverage in southern Iraq.8 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.9 Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 28 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several days of anti-U.S. demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early 8 Risen, James. Hezbollah, in Iraq, Refrains from Attacks on Americans. New York Times, November 24, 2003. 9 See also, White, Jeffrey. To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States. Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003. CRS-10 October 2003. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction in opposing the occupation.10 If true, this could represent the emergence of a Sunni- Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf. Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S. commanders are debating how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October 2003. Another possible explanation is that Moqtada might be trying to position his movement for involvement in the transition regime that is to replace the Governing Council; his involvement would probably require the acquiescence of U.S. authorities in Iraq. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major potential force in post-Saddam Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S. occupation. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous assessments say many Iraqi Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements. Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah Bashir al-Najafi. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, to some Iraqi civil servants. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra- Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s directive be followed. Sistani has not himself commented on whether or not he supports the November 15, 2003 agreement on a political transition (see below), although several Shiite activists claim he supports it. 10 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-11 Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s. Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).11 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party, military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. 11 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-12 Baghdad’s offensive against the opposition accelerated with its August 1996 incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA was operating throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt its presence in Iraq to some extent after the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq. Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups. Chalabi and the INC have argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the former regime in official positions. In post-Saddam Iraq, Alawi has also taken the lead in pushing for the establishment of an internal security service for post-war Iraq, dominated by the major exile factions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency; he was president in October 2003. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. CRS-13 Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequentlybecame a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is removed from power. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti- Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.) CRS-14 Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The Movement for Constitutional Monarchy is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the major-party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The Hurlburt trainees were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement and that direct U.S. military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until Iraq re-admitted the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the CRS-15 Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop a humanitarian aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would contract.12 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.13 The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime 12 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. 13 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy. CRS-16 change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.14 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.15 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.16 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.- led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials, reportedly led bydeputyDefense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed 14 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 15 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 16 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-17 that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending anyor all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990 invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedlyto consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001, attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.) Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its leader, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.17 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. A Defense Department memo to the Senate, excerpted in the Weekly Standard (November 24, 2003, issue), purports to contain intelligence information 17 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-18 that the Administration believes demonstrates a long-standing relationship between Iraq and Al Qaeda.18 Some outside observers express skepticism about Saddam-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about Iraq’s WMD: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. 18 Hayes, Steven. “Case Closed” [http://weeklystandard.com/Content/Public/Articles]. CRS-19 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime, while the State Department believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC. Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former CRS-20 head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,19 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil, a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military groups or figures listed above, with the possible exception of Tawfiq al-Yasseri, has become prominent politically. As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be 19 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-21 part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.20 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.21 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65- member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24- 27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the Governing Council, as is Pachachi.) Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al- Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule, and heads a small party called the “Iraqi Independent Democrats.” Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The 20 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 21 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-22 diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under Resolution 1441, were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. No WMD was used, although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether those missiles were of ranges prohibited bythe United Nations (greater than 150 km). CRS-23 Post-Saddam Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of future resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians welcomed U.S. and British troops, other Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime, the United States set up an occupation structure. The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who served as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, Resolution 1483 lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move was widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post-war governance and reconstruction. CRS-24 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate has taken on new urgencysince resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq have escalated since September 2003. Shortly after the regime fell, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. The Administration organized an meeting in Nasiriyah (April 15, 2003) of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. A follow-up meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, cut this process off and abandoned any public deadlines for transferring sovereignty to an Iraqi government. Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party (see above). The major-party grouping criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and would not be purelyadvisory. He said it would nominate ministryheads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution,22 although it would not assume sovereignty. The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. Prior to the 22 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-25 assassination on September 20, 2003, of Council member Akila al-Hashimi (a Shiite woman and former foreign ministry official) the Council had 25 members, of which 3 were women and 13 were Shiite Muslims. Of the 12 Shiite Muslims still on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are secular. One Sunni Muslim Islamist was appointed — Muhsin Abdul Hamid — who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party; he does not have a clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S. of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They include the Sadr movement; the Hawza of Ayatollah Sistani; the Baath Party or other Sunni elements of the former regime; and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. In some of the above cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other cases, a faction might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Party), Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Talabani (PUK), Hakim (SCIRI), Pachachi, Barzani (KDP), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist. CRS-26 Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership. Cabinet. The Council also completed work on a governmental structure. On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the 1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named, because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense. The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop a new domestic intelligence and national police network,23 although recruitment of such categories of Iraqis has raised suspicions of other Governing Council members, such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the former regime. Debate Over Council Authority/November 2003 Transition Plan. Press reports began to appear in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities were dissatisfied at the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were pressing it to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision- making. Several Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.24 Friction also emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the major exile parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I. Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will 23 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post, September 2, 2003. 24 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003. CRS-27 determine the process for drafting the constitution. However, the committee deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003, for drafting a constitution. In mid-November, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow and resistance attacks becoming more effective, as outlined in a reported CIA assessment,25 CPA administrator Bremer flew urgentlyto Washington to consult with President Bush and other members of the national security team. According to press accounts, President Bush authorized Bremer to discuss with the Governing Council a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis. On November 15, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on a plan that, according to several press reports, includes the following: ! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws.” ! the establishment of 15-person committees in each of Iraq’s 18 provinces, who will in turn select participants for broader local caucuses. The 15-person committees are to be established by January 21, 2004; of the 15 in each committee, five will be appointed by the Governing Council, five by provincial councils, and five by town councils. By the end of May 2004, the caucuses are to select members of a 250-member national assembly. ! By July 1, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly of members of an executive branch, including designation of a provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to assume sovereignty. According to Bremer, there is to be an agreement between the transition government and the United States on the continuation of the U.S. military presence. ! By March 15, 2005, elections of drafters of a permanent constitution. The elections are to be managed by the transition government. ! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a permanent government. The agreement has attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some believe that it will lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should calm resistance. Others believe it represents a U.S. effort to draw down its presence in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will 25 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer, November 12, 2003. CRS-28 not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual factions. Others believe that the process outlined is relatively vague and that much infighting will result at each stage of the process, including the selection of caucus participants, the naming of assembly members, the selection of a transition government, and the naming of a leader of the transition government. Some believe the process will favor the well-organized former exile parties, although others believe the plan provides sufficient opportunity for newly enfranchised groups and individuals in Iraq to gain some say in the political transition. Press reports in late November say some members of the Governing Council want the Council to remain in existence as part of a transition government after that government is established; this suggests that some Governing Council figures fear they might not be selected to be part of a new governing body under the agreed upon process. As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.26 The State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.27 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economyand infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil societycapacity-building; (14) anti- corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003 because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S. casualties taken, and the slow rate at which such U.S. initiatives such as the establishment of a democratic successor regime is moving forward. At present, about 145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 16,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004, and perhaps that many as late as 2006. 26 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 27 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-29 Other reports says the Administration wants to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000 by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.28 The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S. operations. On average, there are about 30 attacks on U.S. forces per day. Resistance attacks have killed about 185 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The most lethal resistance attack was the November 2 shoot-down of a U.S. Chinook helicopter, killing 15 American forces. Another incident, the November 15 collision of two Blackhawks killing 17 American soldiers might have been the result of one helicopter trying to avoid ground fire. U.S. militaryoperations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Soda Mountain (July 12-17); Ivy Serpent (July 12 - early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and Ivy Cyclone II (November 4-ongoing); and Iron Hammer (November 12 -). Iron Hammer, which was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November 12; it has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns. The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent sweep operations, although some commanders say the foreign fighters are not a large factor in the resistance activity. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have been recent fatal attacks in the Shiite south. Some U.S. military officials, including Gen. Abizaid,29 put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed fighters, although some U.S. commanders believe that Saddam and members of his inner circle who are still at large might be 28 Ricks, Thomas. Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04. Washington Post, October 19, 2003. 29 Press briefing by Gen. Abizaid, November 13, 2003. CRS-30 coordinating some resistance elements. Some reports say U.S. commanders believe the resistance is acquiring a more nationwide structure. Some resistance factions have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are identifying themselves with names such as: ! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be the largest and most active resistance group; ! Saddam’s Jihad; ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect; ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq; ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement); ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known; ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group; ! Black Banners Group; ! Nasirite Organization; and ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. An apparent suicide terrorism dimension to the resistance began to emerge in August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N. compound, and other sites. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel at which visiting deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt. The next day, there were four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad, including the headquarters of the International Committee of the Red Cross. A November 12 resistance suicide attack killed 17 Italian peacekeepers at their headquarters in Nasiriyah. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that the resistance is not derailing the U.S. mission to bring about reconstruction and that the insurgency can CRS-31 and will be defeated. Administration fact sheets and statements say that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. Electricity is virtually back to pre-war levels. A new currency has been introduced. Schools and hospitals have reopened throughout Iraq. Administration officials also say Iraqis are freer than at any time in the past 30 years, with a free press and the ability to organize politically. “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the United States. As of mid-November 2003, about 130,000 Iraqis have been recruited to these institutions, and the goal is to have about 220,000 Iraqis serving in these institutions by 2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked or fought poorly in defense. On November 21, 2003, the Bush Administration issued a determination repealing a U.S. ban on arms exports to Iraq so that the United States can supply weapons to the new Iraqi security institutions. Authority to repeal this ban was requested and granted in an FY2003 emergency supplemental appropriations (P.L. 108-11) for the costs of the war. The provision (Section 1504) gives the President the authority to export to Iraq non-lethal military equipment and to export military equipment to a reconstituted or interim Iraqi military if the President determines that doing so is in the national interest. (Section 1503 requires the President to submit regular reports to Congress on any export licenses granted for the exportation of dual use items to Iraq.) A related issue is whether the United States will agree to a proposal by the major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy their individual militia fighters to help augment security.30 The militias could provide additional forces, many of whom have substantial training, that could benefit efforts to maintain security. The potential risks of the proposal are that the party-based militias would likely retain loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government. Another risk is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might erupt into internecine violence. The following, based on a variety of press reports, are the pillars of the Iraqi security institutions: 30 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times, September 20, 2003. CRS-32 ! New Army. The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army following Bremer’s arrival in Baghdad. Some criticized the move as a factor that is now contributing to resistance activity, but others believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq moves toward democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000 person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. The force is expected to be at or near full strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe that this is too rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all recruits. Recruits are paid $60 per month and receive nine weeks of training. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army; according to him, many soldiers of the former army are being recruited, but former members who were at the top four ranks of the Baath Party are not eligible for recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October 2003. The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; that level of funding is provided by the FY2004 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 108-106). ! Police. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 62,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, near the total goal. About 30,000 of the police will undergo training in Hungary, and Jordan has offered to train about 30,000 Iraqi police. Police are paid $60 per month, and must pass a background check ensuring they do not have a record of human rights violations or criminal activity. The Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950 million was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. ! The CPA has is also building a paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,” deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, to assist in maintaining order and combating insurgents. As of late November, 8,500 have been deployed; the goal is for a Corps of 40,000. Recruits are paid $50 per month and cannot have served in Iraq’s former army at a level of colonel or higher. ! A separate “Facilities Protection Service” is being deployed to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricitysubstations, and government buildings. About 48,000 (near the goal) have been deployed, but training is said to be minimal and some are unarmed. The Administration has requested about $140 million to train and equip the Civil Defense Corps and Facilities Protection Service in the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. CRS-33 ! The CPA has thus far recruited 12,000 Iraqis into a customs and border protection force. Members of this force receive a few weeks of U.S. training. Internationalization/U.N. Role.31 Some believe that enlisting greater international participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid recruitment of Iraqi security institutions. At times over the past few months, it appeared that the Administration had decided or was about to decide on this strategy, although it appears the Administration is de-emphasizing this option in favor of those involving greater U.S. control over post-war governance. In his speech on Iraq of September 7, 2003, President Bush said he had authorized Secretary of State Powell to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq, and thereby perhaps trigger additional pledges of force contributions. Thus far, 29 countries (in addition to the United States and Britain) have committed forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. About 27,000 non-U.S. troops are now on the ground (including 12,000 British). Confirmed force pledges include those in Table 1, below. For a more thorough list, which includes contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report RL32105. The commitments of several large nations, including Germany and France, are contingent on a restructuring of post-war governance to restore Iraqi sovereignty. Others, including Japan and South Korea, have expressed willingness to commit substantial numbers of troops but have hesitated on actual deployments due to security conditions. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey will likely use the deployment to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States that Iraqi opposition made the deployment unworkable at this time. The position of U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should only play a larger role in Iraq if there is a road map to an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The SecretaryGeneral subsequently(May27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return 31 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions. CRS-34 to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq ; Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of many nations that want to phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led governance process. The United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511 (adopted unanimously on October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force under unified command” and “invited” the Governing Council to develop, by December 15, 2003, a timetable for drafting a constitution. However, the resolution did not meet the core demands of such countries as France and has not attracted new troop pledges from the major countries such as France and Germany. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly have not wanted to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S. On the other hand, suggesting that the Administration is revisiting its former stance to keep U.N. involvement circumscribed, Secretary of State Powell said in November 2003 that the United States might seek formal U.N. backing for the November 15, 2003, transition governance plan (see above). The move reportedly would also include giving the United Nations a major role in assisting the transition and recognizing the sovereign transition government. During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by a U.S. military official.32 Another possibility was for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) 32 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times, August 28, 2003. CRS-35 Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges Albania 70 Armenia 13 Australia 850 Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 Estonia 47 Georgia 70 Honduras 370 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 Kazakhstan 27 Latvia 150 Lithuania 130 Macedonia 38 Mongolia 180 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 230 Norway 150 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 734 Singapore 192 Slovakia 85 Spain 1,300 Thailand 443 Ukraine 1,650 Total (non-U.S., non- U.K.) Pledged 15,279 CRS-36 Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.33 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003, far less than the 1.5 million barrels per day originally estimated, due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum, said Iraq was exporting at somewhat higher levels (just over 1 million barrels per day) as of early October, and exports are said to be about 1.1 million barrels per day as of late October. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by the end of 2003. The FY2004 supplemental appropriations request asks for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s infrastructure cannot currentlyproduce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided the requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of energy products. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, about $1.4 billion in oil revenues were received by the end of October, somewhat less than anticipated. At inception, the DFI Iraq contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 33 For information on Iraq’s oil industry and its reconstruction, see CRS Report RS21626, Iraq Oil: Reserves, Production, and Potential Revenues. For information on U.S. and other funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-37 supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction). As of late October 2003, the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI), set up by Resolution 1483, had a balance of about $2.3 billion. (During October and November, an additional $2 billion was transferred to the DFI from the oil-for-food escrow account.) In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’ conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminated on November 21, 2003 (see below). A World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.) In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the DFI, mandated by Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisoryand Monitoring Board). The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank, as outlined in Resolution 1483. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Supplemental Funding Needs.34 Partly because oil revenues have lagged behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,” in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq. The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L. 108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion): 34 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-38 ! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions; ! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy development, including programs for women and youth, and the formation of an independent human rights commission, ! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation, ! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure, ! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems; ! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications infrastructure, ! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges, ! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and ! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector initiatives. Termination of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program terminated on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the program had set priorities for about $8.2 billion in contracts, leaving about $2 billion in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already transferred to the DFI in May 2003. In anticipation of the surplus funds as the program was about to terminate, the oil-for-food program transferred $2 billion to the DFI in October and November 2003. Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials believed the program should have been extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of the program. The United States and Britain opposed another extension and, as of its termination on November 21, have taken over its functions. On November 24, 2003, the U.N. CRS-39 Security Council adopted a resolution to continue its “Sanctions Committee” that has monitored the U.N. economic embargo on Iraq since 1990, but to end, subject to later review, that Committee’s mandate to monitor the U.N. embargo on arms sales to Iraq. Part of the Committee’s economic sanctions mandate will include ensuring that assets of the former regime remain frozen. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an interim report on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group had not found actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens of WMD-related program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq concealed from the United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”35 The Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600 million to fund the Survey Group for another six months, and about $300 million has been spent on the search as of early October 2003.36 Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 40 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother 35 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003. 36 Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions. USA Today, October 8, 2003. CRS-40 (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education programs. CRS-41 Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the CRS-42 costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months say reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in the press. CRS-43 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs. ESF transfers to the INC for its operations continued until August 2003.
Another version (English): 18 November 2003 — RL31339_2003-11-18.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Updated November 18, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance Summary Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow of Saddam Hussein, but U.S. officials acknowledge that restoring security to post- war Iraq has proved more difficult than anticipated. Past U.S. efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation has contributed to Administration implementation of several options, including attempts to recruit more foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping, building Iraqi institutions that can maintain security, and accelerating transfer of authority to Iraqi political bodies. Formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.- appointed 25-seat “governing council” as well as a 25-person cabinet; these bodies are relatively representative of Iraq’s ethnic and political factions but have not yet clearly established themselves as legitimate and effective Iraqi institutions that could assume sovereignty. Congress has passed legislation (H.R. 3289, P.L. 108-106) that provides supplemental FY2004 funding for military costs and reconstruction in Iraq (and Afghanistan). See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 14 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Post-Saddam Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Formation of the Major Party Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Debate Over Council Authority/November Transition Plan . . . . . . . . 25 Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Internationalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-Saddam Governance The United States sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq into a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920-1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite dynasty during 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1 Members of the Hashemite dynasty continue to rule in neighboring Jordan. Iraq’s first Hashemite king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. He was ousted in February 1963 by an alliance of the Baath Party and military officers. One of the Baath Party’s allies in the February 1963 coup was Abd al- Salam al-Arif, but Arif purged the Baath in November 1963 and instituted direct military rule. He was killed in a helicopter crash in 1966 and was replaced by his elder brother, Abd al-Rahim al-Arif, who ruled until the Baath Party coup of July 1968. Following that seizure, Saddam Hussein became the second most powerful leader of Iraq as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. In that position, he developed and oversaw a system of overlapping security services to monitor loyalty among the population and within Iraq’s institutions, including the military. On July 17, 1979, Iraq’s aging President, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq. 1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq: Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003. CRS-2 Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid- March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2 2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. CRS-3 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of embezzlement and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be favored by those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, who most supported changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following 3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-4 inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias. Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N. General Assembly meetings that month. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that is to propose a process for drafting a new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and ousted him. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. (Both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency.) CRS-5 In the aftermath of the 1991 Gulf war, the KDP and the PUK agreed in May 1992 to share power after parliamentary and executive elections. In May 1994, tensions between them flared into clashes, and the KDP turned to Baghdad for backing. In August 1996, Iraqi forces helped the KDP capture Irbil, seat of the Kurdish regional government; Iraqi forces acted at the KDP’s invitation. With U.S. mediation, the Kurdish parties agreed on October 23, 1996, to a cease-fire and the establishment of a 400-man peace monitoring force composed mainly of Turkomens (75% of the force). The United States funded the force with FY1997 funds of $3 million for peacekeeping (Section 451 of the Foreign Assistance Act), plus about $4 million in DOD drawdowns for vehicles and communications gear (Section 552 of the FAA). Also set up was a peace supervisory group consisting of the United States, Britain, Turkey, the PUK, the KDP, and Iraqi Turkomens. A tenuous cease-fire held after November 1997, and the KDP and PUK leaders signed an agreement in Washington in September 1998 to work toward resolving the main outstanding issues (sharing of revenues and control over the Kurdish regional government). Reconciliation efforts showed substantial progress in 2002 as the Kurds perceived that the United States might act to overthrow the regime of Saddam Hussein. On October 4, 2002, the two Kurdish factions jointly reconvened the Kurdish regional parliament for the first time since their 1994 clashes. In June 2002, the United States gave the Kurds $3.1 million in new assistance to further the reconciliation process. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda/Zarqawi. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This Ansar faction was led by Mullah Krekar, an Islamist Kurd who reportedly had once studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Ansar reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and agreed to host in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan in 2001. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 primarily Arab fighters lived in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, near the town of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. Possibly because his Ansar movement was largely taken over by the Arab fighters from Afghanistan, Krekar left northern Iraq for northern Europe. He was detained in Norway in August 2002 and now lives there under varying degrees of official restriction. 4 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-6 The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials have said since August 2003 that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck bombings (see below). One press report quotes U.S. intelligence as assessing the number of Ansar fighters inside Iraq at 150.7 Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO). Shiite Islamist Organizations Some U.S. officials and outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post-Saddam Iraq. Many perceive these factions as aligned with Iran. Others believe that Iraq’s Shiite clerics consult with but do not answer to Iran and do not seek to model a post-war Iraqi state after Iran’s Islamic republic. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these Shiite factions is the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an act that could accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community. 5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. 6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post, September 7, 2003. 7 Schmitt, Eric. Cheney Theme of Qaeda Ties to Bombings in Iraq Is Questioned by Some in Administration. New York Times, November 11, 2003. CRS-7 Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr was the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf. Until August 2002, when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Iraqi Sunni Arab factions and most Kurdish parties. Since the fall of the regime, SCIRI leaders have participated in U.S.-led efforts to establish a post-war government and counseled their followers to tolerate, at least temporarily, the U.S. occupation as a necessary vehicle for building an Iraq in which Shiites are adequately represented. At the same time, SCIRI has called for the rapid restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. After he returned to Iraq, Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim had said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian- style Islamic republic. Abd al-Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session in Iraq, sponsored by U.S. officials. Abd al-Aziz later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing Council, and he is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. Nonetheless, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s ultimate goals and its longstanding ties to Iran. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al- Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim’s key aide is Adel Abd-al Mahdi. Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation CRS-8 Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29, 2003, bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing. A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. It was the most active Shiite opposition movement in the few years following Iran’s Islamic revolution in February 1979; Da’wa activists conducted guerrilla attacks against the Baathist regime and attempted assassinations of senior Iraqi leaders, including Tariq Aziz. Baqr Al Sadr and his sister were hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the unrest, and many other Da’wa activists were killed or imprisoned. After the Iraqi crackdown, many surviving Da’wa leaders moved into Iran; some subsequently joined SCIRI, but others rejected Iranian control of Iraq’s Shiite opposition movement and continued to affiliate only with Da’wa. Da’wa’s current leader, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those attacks in the 1980s. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Movement/Moqtada Al Sadr.8 Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not 8 See also, White, Jeffrey. To the Brink: Muqtada Al Sadr Challenges the United States. Washington Institute for Near East Policy, Policywatch 794. October 17, 2003. CRS-9 politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party (see above), it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son of Mohammad Sadiq, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 28 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation was tarnished in early April 2003 when his supporters allegedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Kufa (near Najaf) and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several days of anti-U.S. demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early October 2003. Later in October 2003, and amid assessments that Moqtada’s popularity is low and waning further, his supporters stepped up the challenge to the United States. He named an alternate “government” for Iraq, and some of his followers formed armed militias and attempted unsuccessfully to seize control of some mosques in Najaf. Pro-Sadr militants also ambushed some U.S. forces. Press reports say U.S. commanders are debating how to control Moqtada Al Sadr, with the option of arresting him apparently under consideration. Possibly to head off any U.S. action against him, Moqtada tempered some of his statements in October. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he CRS-10 reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S. occupation. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics, and numerous assessments say many Iraqi Shiites follow him and respond to his pronouncements. Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, Ayatollah Mohammad Isaac Fayadh, and Ayatollah Bashir al-Najafi. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, to some Iraqi civil servants. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra- Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new constitution should be elected, not appointed. That statement, according to some Iraqi officials, caused a deadlock in the effort to develop a roadmap to the writing of a constitution; Shiites on the Governing Council reportedly insisted that Sistani’s directive be followed. Sistani has not himself commented on whether or not he supports the November 15, 2003 agreement on a political transition (see below), although some Shiite activists claim he supports it. Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization, the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization, has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, a Shiite cleric, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s. Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. On November 14, 2003, Modarassi criticized the United States for not holding elections to any of the political bodies formed thus far. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. As noted above, in May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at CRS-11 the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).9 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consisted of defectors from Iraq’s Baath Party, military, and security services who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Baghdad’s offensive against the opposition accelerated with its August 1996 incursion into northern Iraq, at the invitation of the KDP. Iraq not only helped the KDP capture Irbil from the PUK, but Saddam’s forces took advantage of their presence in northern Iraq to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout the north. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA was operating throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt its presence in Iraq to some extent after the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq. Although it was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups. Chalabi and the INC have argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the former regime in official positions. Alawi has also taken the lead in pushing for the establishment of an internal security service for post-war Iraq, dominated by the major exile factions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. He is president during October 2003. 9 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-12 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein, although virtually no one in Congress or outside was advocating a U.S.-led military invasion to accomplish that goal. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles and services (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime CRS-13 headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is removed from power. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the major anti- Saddam organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). (Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list.) Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The Movement for Constitutional Monarchy is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the major-party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999-2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United CRS-14 States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The Hurlburt trainees were not brought into Operation Iraqi Freedom or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement and that direct U.S. military action was not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Clinton Administration officials added that supporting the opposition militarily could draw the United States into long-term military involvement in Iraq. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening major use of force, or by launching repeated air strikes, unless and until Iraq re-admitted the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop a humanitarian aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute humanitarian aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC would contract.10 10 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. CRS-15 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq started out similar to that of the previous administration, but changed dramatically after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.11 The Administration believed that the “smart sanctions” proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.12 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the persistent questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy were debated early in the Bush Administration.13 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. 11 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program, Sanctions, and U.S. Policy. 12 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 13 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. CRS-16 Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the FY2001 ESF appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.14 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was failing or, at best, inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.- led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials, reportedly led by deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz, believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. (Iraq was a designated state sponsor of terrorism during 1979-82, and was again designated after the 1990 invasion of Kuwait. Iraq remains on the list, despite the change of regime, although it is expected it will be removed.) As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Most senior officials did not specifically assert that Iraq was an imminent or immediate threat to U.S. security, but they did assert that Iraq was a “grave and gathering” threat that was best blunted before the threat became imminent. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001, attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before 14 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-17 acting but must instead act preemptively or preventively. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.) Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its leader, Abu Musab al-Zarqawi, had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.15 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. Senior U.S. officials asserted the following about Iraq’s WMD: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not 15 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-18 necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. Numerous press reports indicated that the Defense Department and office of Vice President Cheney believed the INC might be able to lead a post-Saddam regime, while the State Department believed the INC had little popularity inside Iraq. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in FY2001 ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. Under the agreement, the State Department-provided $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities (about $4 million); the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which were to be conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- CRS-19 based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC. Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,16 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil, a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement 16 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-20 into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) The Opposition Positions Itself Before War/Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq or attracted major followings. As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million authorized for defense articles and services under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.17 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.18 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65- member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24- 27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the Governing Council, as is Pachachi.) 17 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 18 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-21 Adnan Pachachi, who is about 80, served as foreign minister and ambassador to the United Nations during the 1960s, under the military governments of Abd al- Salam and then Abd al-Rahman Arif (“the Arif brothers”). Pachachi lived in exile in the UAE during Saddam Hussein’s rule, and heads a small party called the “Iraqi Independent Democrats.” Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings, based on WMD inspections that resumed November 27, 2002, under Resolution 1441, were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program. However, the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full CRS-22 attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. No WMD was used, although Iraq did fire some ballistic missiles into Kuwait. It is not clear whether those missiles were of ranges prohibited by the United Nations (greater than 150 km). Post-Saddam Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about the effectiveness of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The outcome of the debate might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance.) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). After the fall of the regime, the United States set up an occupation structure. The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from CRS-23 the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move was widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post- war governance and reconstruction. In press interviews, Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld said he was not informed of the restructuring in advance. Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. This debate has taken on new urgency since resistance attacks on U.S. forces and international organizations in Iraq have escalated since September 2003. Shortly after the regime fell, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, cut this process off and abandoned any public deadlines for transferring sovereignty to an Iraqi government. Formation of the Major Party Grouping. In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five major parties agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The major-party grouping later criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the CRS-24 planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.19 The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the major-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered the most pro-U.S. of all Iraqi factions and are generally reluctant to openly criticize the CPA. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims. Another, former foreign ministry official Akila al-Hashimi, a Shiite woman, was killed in an assassination attempt on September 20, 2003. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al- Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. 19 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-25 The major factions not directly represented on the Council are varied. They include the Sadr movement; the Hawza of Ayatollah Sistani; the Baath Party or other Sunni elements of the former regime; and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy. Some key tribes do not have members on the Council either. In some of the above cases, the CPA did not want to include a particular faction; in other cases, a faction might not have wanted to be associated with the occupation. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Parrty), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist. Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership. New Cabinet. The Council also completed work on a governmental structure. On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the 1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named, because U.S.-led military forces are responsible for defense. The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop a new domestic intelligence and national police network,20 although recruitment of such categories of Iraqis has raised suspicions of other Governing Council members, such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the former regime. Debate Over Council Authority/November Transition Plan. Press reports began to appear in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities were dissatisfied at the relatively low level of activity of the Governing Council, and were pressing it to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision- making. Several Council members said that the Council could not do so unless and 20 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post, September 2, 2003. CRS-26 until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.21 Friction also emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the major exile parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send peacekeeping troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I. Differences also appeared over the Council’s failure to agree on a process for drafting a new constitution and holding national elections. The Bush Administration had linked completion of these steps to the end of the U.S. occupation and a restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. In early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. However, the committee deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission and others, such as Ayatollah Sistani, saying the drafters should be elected. Secretary of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would be very difficult to meet that deadline. U.N. Security Council Resolution 1511, of October 16, 2003, invited the Council to develop a timetable by December 15, 2003, for drafting a constitution. In mid-November, with popular resistance to the occupation appearing to grow and resistance attacks becoming more effective, as outlined in a reported CIA assessment,22 CPA administrator Bremer flew urgently to Washington to consult with President Bush and other members of the national security team. According to press accounts, President Bush authorized Bremer to discuss with the Governing Council a new plan to accelerate the transfer of political sovereignty to Iraqis. On November 15, the CPA and the Governing Council announced they had reached agreement on a plan that, according to several press reports, includes the following: ! the writing of a provisional constitution, or set of “Basic Laws.” ! the establishment of 15 person committees in each of Iraq’s 18 provinces who will select participants for local caucuses. By the end of May 2004, the caucuses should select members of a 250- member national assembly. ! By July 1, 2004, the selection by the 250 member national assembly of members of an executive branch, including designation of a provisional leader of Iraq. This new provisional government is to assume sovereignty. According to Bremer, there is to be an agreement between the transition government and the United States on the continuation of the U.S. military presence. 21 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003. 22 Landay, Jonathan. “CIA Has A Bleak Analysis of Iraq.” Philadelphia Inquirer, November 12, 2003. CRS-27 elections of drafters of a permanent The elections are to be managed by the transition ! By March 15, 2005, constitution. government. ! By December 31, 2005, the holding of national elections for a permanent government. The agreement has attracted mixed reviews both abroad and within Iraq. Some believe that it will lead to a relatively rapid restoration of sovereignty that should calm resistance. Others believe it represents a U.S. effort to draw down its presence in Iraq to minimize further U.S. casualties, and that the political process outlined will not ensure formation of a genuine democracy, but rather a coalition of individual factions. Others believe that the process outlined is relatively vague and that much infighting will result at each stage of the process, including the selection of caucus participants, the naming of assembly members, the selection of a transition government, and the naming of a leader of the transition government. Some believe the process will favor the well-organized former exile parties, although others believe the plan provides sufficient opportunity for newly enfranchised groups and individuals in Iraq to gain some say in the political transition. As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.23 The State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq, although some Iraqis who participated are now in various Iraqi official bodies. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.24 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti- corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Iraqi Resistance and U.S. Security Operations Experts note that the U.S. policy debate has intensified since September 2003 because of the apparently escalating Iraqi resistance, an increasing number of U.S. casualties taken, and the slow rate at which such U.S. initiatives such as the establishment of a democratic successor regime is moving forward. At present, about 145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 10,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war 23 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 24 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-28 peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004. Another report says the Administration wants to try to reduce U.S. forces to 100,000 by mid-2004 and to 50,000 by 2005.25 The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services or to avenge the accidental killing of Iraqi civilians during U.S. operations. On average, there are about 30 attacks on U.S. forces per day. Resistance attacks have killed about 160 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The most lethal resistance attack was the November 2 shoot-down of a U.S. Chinook helicopter, killing 15 American forces. Another incident, the November 15 collision of two Blackhawks killing 17 American soldiers might have been the result of one helicopter trying to avoid ground fire, although the cause of the collision has not been announced. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least six sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Soda Mountain (July 12-17); Ivy Serpent (July 12 - early September); Ivy Focus (September 10 - ongoing); Ivy Cyclone and Ivy Cyclone II (November 4-ongoing); and Iron Hammer (November 12 -). Iron Hammer, which was launched as response to growing resistance attacks, began on November 12; it has included air attacks on insurgent positions near Baghdad and nearby towns. The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent sweep operations. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have been recent fatal attacks on other foreign forces in the Shiite areas of Baghdad (“Sadr City”) and in southern Iraq. Some of the Shiite riots and demonstrations have been influenced by pro-Sadr activists. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from 25 Ricks, Thomas. Reduction in U.S. Troops Eyed for ‘04. Washington Post, October 19, 2003. CRS-29 exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.26 If true, this could represent the emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. Some U.S. military officials, including Gen. Abizaid,27 put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed fighters, although some U.S. commanders believe that Saddam and members of his inner circle who are still at large might be coordinating some resistance elements. Some reports say U.S. commanders believe the resistance is acquiring a more nationwide structure. Some resistance factions have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are identifying themselves with names such as: ! Al Awda (the Return), believed to be the largest and most active resistance group; ! Saddam’s Jihad; ! the Movement of the Victorious Sec;t ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement) ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad, said to be a highly active group ! Black Banners Group ! Nasirite Organization ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers and peacekeeping forces to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet and in Administration statements, and that life is, for the 26 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17, 2003. 27 Press briefing by Gen. Abizaid, November 13, 2003. CRS-30 most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. (“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation,” August 8, 2003.) An apparent terrorist component to the resistance began to emerge in August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N. compound, and other sites. On October 25, 2003, the resistance rocketed the hotel at which visiting deputy Defense Secretary Wolfowitz was staying; he was unhurt. The next day, there were four suicide car bombings at various sites in Baghdad, including the headquarters of the International Committee of the Red Cross. A November 12 resistance suicide attack killed 18 Italian peacekeepers at their headquarters in Nasiriyah. “Iraqification”/Building Security Institutions. An option for improving security conditions that has been pursued by the Administration is to try to increasingly transfer security responsibilities to Iraqi institutions. Some in the Administration appear to prefer this option to alternatives, advocated by some in and outside the Administration, that involve turning over greater responsibility to the international community in exchange for donations of peacekeeping forces. This initiative is an attempt to improve security in Iraq, generate better intelligence on resistance factions, and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions. It is hoped that these institutions could eventually take over the security function from the United States. As of mid-November 2003, about 120,000 Iraqis have been recruited to these institutions, and the goal is to have about 220,000 Iraqis serving in these institutions by 2004. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked. Some are now key targets of the resistance. A related issue is whether or not the United States will agree to a proposal by the major Iraqi parties on the Governing Council to deploy their individual militia fighters to help augment security.28 The militias could provide additional forces, many of whom have substantial training, that could benefit efforts to maintain security. The potential risks of the proposal are that the party-based militias would likely retain loyalties to their party leaders, not necessarily to an Iraqi government. Another risk is that there might be tensions among the various militias that might erupt into internecine violence. The CPA formally disbanded the former Iraqi army following Bremer’s arrival in Baghdad. Some criticized the move as a factor that is now contributing to resistance activity, but others believe the move was necessary to ensure that Iraq 28 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times, September 20, 2003. CRS-31 moves toward democracy. As part of U.S. efforts to build new Iraqi security institutions, the CPA is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000 person New Iraqi Army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. The force is expected to be at or near full strength by mid-2004, although some experts believe that this is too rapid a pace to ensure proper training and ensure the loyalty of all recruits. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. According to Slocombe, many soldiers of the former army are being recruited, but former members who were at the top four ranks of the Baath Party are not eligible for recruitment. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October 2003. The Administration requested about $2 billion to train and equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; that level of funding is provided by the FY2004 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 108-106). The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 80,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, near the total goal. About 30,000 of the police will undergo training in Hungary, and Jordan has offered to train about 30,000 Iraqi police. The Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request; $950 million was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. The CPA is also recruiting a 22,000-man, paramilitary “Civil Defense Corps,” deployed in each of Iraq’s provinces, to assist in maintaining order. A separate 20,000-person “Facilities Protection Service” is envisioned to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. The Administration has requested about $140 million to train and equip these civil defense forces in the FY2004 supplemental funding request; that amount was appropriated in P.L. 108-106. Internationalization.29 Some believe that enlisting greater international participation in peacekeeping would be more effective than the rapid recruitment of Iraqi security institutions. At times over the past few months, it appeared that the Administration had decided or was about to decide on this strategy, although it appears the Administration is de-emphasizing this option in favor of those involving greater U.S. control over post-war governance. In his speech on Iraq of September 7, 2003, President Bush said he had authorized Secretary of State Powell to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq, and thereby perhaps trigger additional pledges of force contributions. Thus far, 29 countries (in addition to the United States and Britain) have committed forces to help secure Iraq. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led force numbers about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force numbers about 9,200, of which 2,300 are Polish. About 27,000 non-U.S. troops are now on the ground (including 12,000 British). Confirmed force pledges 29 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL32105. Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions. CRS-32 include those in Table 1, below. For a more thorough list, which includes contributions of support or medical personnel, see CRS Report RL32105. The commitments of several large nations, including Germany and France, are contingent on a restructuring of post-war governance to restore Iraqi sovereignty. Others, including Japan and South Korea, have expressed willingness to commit substantial numbers of troops but have hesitated on actual deployments due to security conditions. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces, but the pledge drew criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey will likely use the deployment to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. Turkey subsequently informed the United States that Iraqi opposition made the deployment unworkable at this time. The position of U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should only play a larger role in Iraq if there is a road map to an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (adopted unanimously) provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, the account controlled by the CPA for reconstruction. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq ; Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of many nations that want to phase out the U.S.-led occupation in favor of a U.N.-led governance process. The United States obtained agreement on Resolution 1511 (adopted unanimously on October 16, 2003) that authorized a “multinational force under unified command” and “invited” the Governing Council to develop, by December 15, 2003, a timetable for drafting a constitution. However, the resolution did not meet the core demands of such countries as France and has not attracted new troop pledges from the major countries such as France and Germany. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly do not want to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S. During negotiations on Resolution 1511, a number of different formulas were discussed for broadening peacekeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State CRS-33 Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion was for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, that would be commanded by a U.S. military official.30 Another possibility was for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges Albania 70 Armenia 13 Australia 850 Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 Estonia 47 Georgia 70 Honduras 370 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 Kazakhstan 27 Latvia 150 Lithuania 130 Macedonia 38 Mongolia 180 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 230 Norway 150 Poland 2,300 30 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times, August 28, 2003. CRS-34 Portugal 120 Romania 734 Singapore 192 Slovakia 85 Spain 1,300 Thailand 443 Ukraine 1,650 Total (non-U.S. non- U.K.) Pledged 15,279 Restarting Iraq’s Economic Engine One of the major functions of the CPA is to accomplish economic reconstruction. By all accounts, restoring Iraq’s economy depends, in large part, on rehabilitating Iraq’s energy infrastructure.31 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction. As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003, far less than the 1.5 million barrels per day originally estimated, due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum, said Iraq was exporting at somewhat higher levels (just over 1 million barrels per day) as of early October, and exports are said to be about 1.5 million barrels per day as of mid November. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees have hoped to reach by late 2003. The 31 For information on U.S. and other funding for Iraq’s reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-35 FY2004 supplemental appropriations request asks for $1.2 billion to repair Iraq’s oil infrastructure, plus $900 million to import refined energy products that Iraq’s infrastructure cannot currently produce until it is repaired. P.L. 108-106 provided the requested amount for infrastructure, but only about $700 million for imports of energy products. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, about $1.4 billion in oil revenues were received by the end of October, somewhat less than anticipated. At inception, the DFI Iraq contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction). As of late October 2003, the Development Fund for Iraq (DFI), set up by Resolution 1483, had a balance of about $2.3 billion. In order to accelerate reconstruction, the DFI was deemed to require international donations, such as those pledged at the October 23-24 donors’ conference in Madrid, additional U.S. appropriations, and funds remaining after the U.N.-run “oil for food program” terminates on November 22, 2003 (see below). A World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding requested by the Administration in September 2003. At the Madrid donors conference, donors pledged about $4 billion in grants and $9 billion in credits, in addition to the $20 billion to be provided by the United States. (For additional information on international pledges, see CRS Report RL32015, Post-War Iraq: A Table and Chronology of Foreign Contributions.) In late October 2003, a multilateral board to monitor the DFI, mandated by Resolution 1483, was established (the International Advisory and Monitoring Board). The DFI is held in the Federal Reserve Bank of New York, not Iraq’s Central Bank, as outlined in Resolution 1483. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Supplemental Funding Needs.32 Partly because oil revenues have lagged behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental 32 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-36 funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,” in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq. The FY2004 supplemental appropriation (conf. report H.Rept. 108-337, P.L. 108-106) provided the following funds for Iraq reconstruction (total $18.7 billion): ! $3.243 billion for security and law enforcement, including the New Iraqi Army. border enforcement and other security functions; ! $1.32 billion for justice and civil society and democracy development, including programs for women and youth, and the formation of an independent human rights commission, ! $5.56 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation, ! $1.89 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure, ! $4.332 billion to repair water and sewage systems; ! $500 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications infrastructure, ! $370 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges, ! $800 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and ! $453 million for education, jobs training, and private sector initiatives. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program terminates on November 21, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new DFI $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. As of the start of the war, the program’s escrow account had about $11 billion to fund imports of humanitarian and other goods. Since then, the CRS-37 program has set priorities for about $8.5 billion in contracts, leaving about $1.5 billion in unallocated funds remaining, after subtracting the $1 billion already transferred to the DFI in May 2003. Some press reports suggest that U.N. officials believe the program should be extended in order to facilitate an orderly phase-out of the program. The United States and Britain are said to oppose another extension and say they are preparing to take over its functions. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) Searching for Former Regime Violations and Officials Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover evidence of gross human rights abuses and other violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an interim report on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group had not found actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens of WMD-related program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq concealed from the United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”33 The Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600 million to fund the Survey Group for another six months, and about $300 million has been spent on the search as of early October 2003.34 Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 40 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin 33 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003. 34 Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions. USA Today, October 8, 2003. CRS-38 Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth and Reconciliation Commission,” and the establishment of a human rights commission. The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to the victims of those abuses. In the FY2004 supplemental request, about $25 million CRS-39 is requested for these and related activities, such as women and youth civic education programs. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although CRS-40 the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months say reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in the press. CRS-41 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 10 October 2003 — RL31339_2003-10-10.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated October 10, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished a long-standing objective, the overthrow of Saddam Hussein, but the post-war period has, by almost all accounts, proved more difficult than the Administration had anticipated. Past U.S. efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations had ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation, punctuated by the August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N. headquarters in Baghdad, has contributed to Administration consideration of an attempt to enlist increased foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction. Some in the Administration apparently prefer to focus on the building of Iraqi institutions that can maintain security. Formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.- appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. The Administration hopes that the formation of the council and subsequent appointment of a cabinet will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance to U.S. forces in Iraq. See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Reconstruction Assistance, and CRS Report RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Prospects for Elections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . 24 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Financial Pledges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Congressional Reactions Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq from dictatorship to a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920- 1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite dynasty during 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1 Its first king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. During 1958-1968, Iraq had a succession of military governments, with a brief period of Baathist rule during 1963. The Baath Party regained power in 1968, and Saddam Hussein became the second most powerful leader of Iraq as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. Iraq’s President, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq on July 17, 1979. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the Republican Guard forces, composed mainly of 1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq: Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003. CRS-2 regime loyalists, had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid- March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups 2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. CRS-3 publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency. Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 59 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias. 3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-4 Chalabi is part of a grouping of five leaders of major exile parties that held a series of planning meetings shortly prior to the 2003 war. The major-party grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the major parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He was president of the Council during the month of September 2003 and represented Iraq at the U.N. General Assembly meetings that month. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he taught Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University prior to returning to Iraq after the fall of Saddam. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the CRS-5 U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials said in August that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck bombings (see below). Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO). Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups 4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” New York Times, December 6, 2002. 5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. 6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post, September 7, 2003. CRS-6 in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community. Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al- Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29, 2003, bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, some Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing. A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI and is considered by observers to have substantial Shiite support north of Basra. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the CRS-7 regime, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI’s ultimate goals. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of at least temporary cooperation with the occupation, Abd al- Aziz al Hakim met with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute the major-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine- person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, Iraq’s oldest organized Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency; he was first to hold that post. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr CRS-8 City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping is not represented in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Several days of anti-U.S. demonstrations by pro-Sadr Shiites broke out in Baghdad in early October 2003. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power and has had only limited contact with him since; he reportedly refuses to meet with representatives of the U.S. occupation. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf-based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, and Isaac Fayadh. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that the drafters of a new constitution should be elected, not appointed. Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, CRS-9 Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).7 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of Iraqi military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials in those organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took 7 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-10 advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. In addition, Chalabi and the INC have argued for comprehensive purging of former Baathists from Iraq’s institutions, while the INA, which has ex-Baathists in it, has argued for retaining some members of the former regime in official positions. Alawi was part of the major-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. He is president during October 2003. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. CRS-11 Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air- power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is removed from power. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the pro-monarchist Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former CRS-12 Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven- party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC CRS-13 distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.8 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.9 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.10 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of 8 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. Program. March 2, 2001. 9 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food 10 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, CRS-14 civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.11 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.12 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab- Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. 11 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 12 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-15 The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.) Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.13 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to 13 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-16 gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and no actual WMD have thus far been found, although the Administration asserts that it has found evidence of WMD programs and that actual weapons themselves might still be found in Iraq. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. CRS-17 In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC. Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,14 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. 14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-18 ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil, a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq or attracted major followings. As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.16 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in 15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 16 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-19 London. The conference was organized by the same six exile groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so would give the impression that the United States was backing the exile groups in their efforts to dominate post-war Iraq politically. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65- member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24- 27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The six-person committee included PUK leader Talabani, KDP leader Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of these groups is on the Governing Council, as is Pachachi.) Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national CRS-20 security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. Post-War Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on economic reconstruction and its funding, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.) Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing CRS-21 major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from that deadline. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. This process was cut short in May 2003 when the Bush Administration decided it would not produce an acceptable Iraqi government. In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The major parties later criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi exile parties. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.17 The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, who is not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. 17 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-22 The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and could be considered generally pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims. Another, former foreign ministry official Akila al- Hashimi, a Shiite woman, was killed in an assassination attempt on September 20, 2003. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi- based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Those who rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Ibrahim Jafari (Da’wa Parrty), Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist. Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership. Press reports in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities are pressing the Governing Council to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-making, although some Council members say that the Council cannot do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.18 Friction also emerged in October 2003 over a time-frame for a return to Iraqi sovereignty; the major exile parties on the Council want an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Other tensions emerged over U.S. acceptance of Turkey’s offer to send 18 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003. CRS-23 peacekeeping troops to Iraq; most Iraqi resent Turkey as the successor of the Ottoman Empire that ruled Iraq for the 400 years prior to World War I. New Cabinet. The Council has completed work on a governmental structure. On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a longtime close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Zibari served during most of the 1990s as KDP representative in Washington. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named. The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop a new domestic intelligence and national police network,19 although recruitment of such categories of Iraqis might raise suspicions of other Governing Council members, such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the former regime. Prospects for Elections. The Bush Administration has hailed the formation of the Council and the cabinet as major steps toward restoring Iraq’s sovereignty. Other major benchmarks will be the drafting of a constitution and the holding of national elections, which the Bush Administration is saying might be held as soon as mid-2004, if the Iraqis complete the necessary preparatory work such as the adoption of a constitution. These steps would, according to the Administration, pave the way for an end to the U.S. occupation and a restoration of full Iraqi sovereignty. Secretary of State Powell said in late September 2003 that the Iraqis should be able to draft a constitution within six months, although Iraqi officials subsequently said it would be very difficult to meet that deadline. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. The committee reportedly deadlocked, with some arguing for an appointed constitutional drafting commission and others saying the drafters should be elected. The timetable for these steps might be affected by the debate between the United States and its allies over the structure of international participation in post-war Iraq (see below). As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.20 However, the State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense 19 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post, September 2, 2003. 20 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. CRS-24 Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.21 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about 145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel and about 12,000 are British. There are an additional 10,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004. The Resistance. U.S. commanders in Iraq said in early October 2003 that the sophistication and capabilities of the armed resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing. Centcom commander John Abizaid had said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. On average, there are about 15-25 attacks on U.S. forces per day. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least five sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation Ivy Serpent (begun July 12, ongoing). Such attacks have killed about 85 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. 21 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-25 The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent sweep operations. Resistance attacks are more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have been recent fatal attacks on U.S., British, and Danish forces in the Shiite areas of Baghdad (“Sadr City”) and in and around Basra. Some of the Shiite riots and demonstrations have been influenced by pro-Sadr activists. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.22 This represents the possible emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are using such names as ! Al Awda (the Return) ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement) ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad ! Black Banners Group ! Nasirite Organization ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States and attacked Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet and in Administration 22 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-26 statements, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. (“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation,” August 8, 2003.) An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with car and truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. Smaller suicide bombings have occurred since at Iraqi police facilities, the U.N. compound, and other sites. The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Another alteration of the U.S. post-war structure was made public in early October 2003; the White House announced that an “Iraq Stabilization Group” under the direction of National Security Adviser Condoleezza Rice would coordinate interagency support to the CPA in Iraq. The move was widely viewed as a diminution in Defense Department control over post- war governance and reconstruction. In press interviews, Secretary of Defense Rumsfeld said he was not informed of the restructuring in advance. Building Security Institutions. In an attempt to improve security in Iraq and free up U.S. forces for counter-insurgency missions in Iraq, the CPA is building new Iraqi institutions that, it is hoped, could eventually take over the security function from the United States. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked. Some are now key targets of the resistance. The United States is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are CRS-27 expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The first 700 recruits were graduated in early October 2003. The Administration has requested about $2 billion to train and equip the new army in its FY2004 supplemental funding request. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 40,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, more than half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.23 (Kerik announced his resignation in early September 2003.) About 30,000 of the police will undergo training in Hungary, and Jordan has offered to train about 30,000 Iraqi police. The Administration has requested about $1 billion to train and equip an Iraqi police force in its FY2004 supplemental funding request. The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all-Iraqi “Civil Defense Corps” to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. The Administration has requested about $75 million to train and equip this civil defense force in the FY2004 supplemental funding request. Despite its complaints about lack of authority, the five major parties on the Council - the INC, the INA, SCIRI, the PUK, and the KDP - appear to be trying to move ahead on assuming more responsibility for security, apart from the institutions being established by the CPA. The five are reportedly pressing the United States to allow Iraqi militias, most of which are controlled by these five parties, to play a greater role in maintaining security and for U.S. forces in Iraq to largely withdraw from street patrols into garrisons.24 Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts led by former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. In early October 2003, Kay released an interim report on the Survey Group’s WMD investigation. The report said the Group had not found actual weapons of mass destruction in Iraq, but it had found “dozens of WMD-related program activities and significant amounts of equipment that Iraq concealed from the United Nations during the inspections that began in late 2002.”25 23 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times, July 18, 2003. 24 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times, September 20, 2003. 25 Testimony of David Kay before the House and Senate Intelligence Committees, and the Defense Subcommittee of the House Appropriations Committee. October 2, 2003. CRS-28 The Administration, according to press reports, has requested an additional $600 million to fund the Survey Group for another six months.26 Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.27 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed in late July 2003. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, but exports were running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003, far less than the 1.5 million barrels per day originally estimated, due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq’s new “Oil Minister,” Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum, said Iraq was exporting at somewhat higher levels (just over 1 million barrels per day) as of early October. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, because oil revenues are less than what was predicted, the budget deficit is likely to be more than $4 billion, far more than the $2.2 billion deficit projected in June The higher deficit means that the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below), will run out of money by the end of 2003, unless additional funds are received through 26 Politics Aside, Iraqi Weapons Report Raises Crucial Questions. USA Today, October 8, 2003. 27 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-29 donations, such as pledges at a planned October 23-24 donors’ conference in Madrid, or U.S. appropriations (see below). The Development Fund for Iraq contained about $7 billion when it was established in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction (FY2003 supplemental, P.L. 108-11, which appropriated about $2.5 billion for reconstruction). A World Bank estimate, released in early October 2003, said Iraq reconstruction would require about $56 billion during 2004-2007, including the $20 billion in U.S. funding requested by the Administration in September 2003 (see below). A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Supplemental Funding Needs.28 Partly because oil revenues are lagging behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,” in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq. The supplemental request asks for the following for Iraq reconstruction: ! $2.1 billion for border enforcement and other security functions, ! $2.1 billion for establishing Iraqi security and civil defense institutions (see above), ! $900 million for justice and civil society development, including programs for women and youth, and the formation of an independent human rights commission, ! $6 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation, ! $2.1 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure, ! $3.7 billion to repair water and sewage systems, ! $900 million for water conservation facilities, ! $800 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications infrastructure, ! $500 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges, ! $900 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and ! $300 million for jobs training and private sector initiatives. 28 For information on the status of legislative consideration of the request for supplemental funding, see RL32090, FY2004 Supplemental Appropriations for Iraq, Afghanistan, and the Global War on Terrorism: Military Operations & Reconstruction Assistance. CRS-30 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22; the program terminates on November 22, 2003. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance29 The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing resistance that is causing continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. In his speech on Iraq of September 7, 2003, President Bush said he has authorized Secretary of State Powell to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq, and thereby perhaps trigger additional pledges of force contributions. Thus far, over 30 countries have made commitments of forces to help secure Iraq, but the commitments of several large nations, including Germany and France appear to be contingent on U.N. authorization and a restructuring of post-war governance to allow for a greater U.N. role. The position of U.N. Secretary General Kofi Annan appears to be close to that of France; he has cut U.N. staff in Iraq because of security concerns and said the United Nations should only play a larger role in Iraq if there is a road map to an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. 29 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction. CRS-31 Since the fall of Saddam Hussein, the Administration has sought U.N. backing for its post-war efforts. Resolution 1483 (May 22, 2003), which was adopted unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. These resolutions did not satisfy the requirements of many nations that want the United Nations to play the lead role in rebuilding Iraq politically. The United States has circulated a draft resolution that would enhance the U.N. role in post-war governance and authorize a multinational force. However, the U.S. draft reportedly does not offer to meet key demands of such countries as France to end the U.S. occupation of Iraq in favor of a U.N. led process that leads to an early restoration of Iraqi sovereignty. Press reports in early October said the United States might withdraw the draft. Some in the Bush Administration reportedly do not want to cede control over post-war governance to the United Nations or other nations; they maintain that doing so would confuse the post-war command structure and possibly lead to the formation of a government in Iraq that is not committed to democracy and not necessarily pro-U.S. Those in the Administration who take this view reportedly want to accelerate the training and equipping of Iraqi security forces and believe that additional U.S. and international forces might not be needed to stabilize Iraq. A number of different formulas have been discussed for broadening peackeeping duties in Iraq. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion could be for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, which would be commanded by a U.S. military official.30 This option appears to still be under consideration, as are others, such as the possibility that NATO might command a multilateral force. The United States has had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more 30 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times, August 28, 2003. CRS-32 information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) The Administration maintains that, even without additional pledges, the peacekeeping function is already mostly multilateral. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early October 2003, and there are now about 22,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 12,000 British). Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1, but, for a more thorough list, see CRS Report RL31843. On October 7, the Turkish parliament approved a government recommendation to send up to 10,000 peacekeeping forces to Iraq. The pledge drew criticism from Iraq’s Governing Council that Turkey will likely use the deployment to meddle in Iraq’s internal affairs. The CPA and the Governing Council are discussing conditions under which the deployment might move forward. Financial Pledges. Other countries have agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. Pledges are discussed in CRS Report RL31843, referenced above. The Administration is reportedly hoping for at least $10 billion in new contributions at the late October donor’s conference in Madrid, but outside experts say pledges will likely come in well below that figure. On the other hand, Japan reportedly will pledge about $5 billion for Iraq reconstruction. Table 1. CRS-33 Multinational Division Force Pledges Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 El Salvador 300 Estonia 55 Georgia 100 Honduras 300 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 (mostly military police) Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support). (Implementation placed on hold after U.N. HQ bombing ) Latvia 150 Lithuania 85 Macedonia 28 Mongolia 200 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 300 Norway 150 Philippines 500 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 150 Slovakia 85 South Korea 700 (mostly medical) Spain 1,300 Thailand 500 Ukraine 1650 Total Pledged 17,100 CRS-34 Fate of the Deposed Regime An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which CRS-35 an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. The FY2004 supplemental request contains a request for funding of a “Truth and Reconciliation Commission.” The requests also asks for funding for further investigations into the human rights abuses committed by the former regime, as well as some memorials to the victims of those abuses. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). CRS-36 The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. Some Members who have visited Iraq in recent months say reconstruction is proceeding well and that Iraq is more stable than that portrayed in the press. CRS-37 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 22 September 2003 — RL31339_2003-09-22.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated September 22, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary The United States has attempted since the early 1990s to oust Saddam Hussein from power in Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. Operation Iraqi Freedom accomplished that objective, but the post-war period has, by almost all accounts, proved more difficult than the Administration had anticipated. In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003 the United States launched Operation Iraqi Freedom to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stabilityand democracy throughout the Middle East. However, escalating resistance to the U.S.-led occupation, punctuated by the August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N. headquarters in Baghdad, has contributed to an Administration decision to try to enlist increased foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction and to accelerate the building of Iraqi institutions that can maintain security. Formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. The Administration hopes that the formation of the council and subsequent appointment of a cabinet will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq. See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Prospects for Elections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Post-War U.S. Operations and theCoalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . . 24 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Congressional Reactions Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. The Bush Administration’s stated goal is to transform Iraq from dictatorship to a democracy that could be a model for the rest of the region. Iraq has not had experience with a democratic form of government, although parliamentary elections were held during the period of British rule under a League of Nations mandate (1920- 1932). Iraq, which became independent in 1932, was governed by kings from the Hashemite dynastyduring 1921-1958, although with substantial British direction and influence.1 Its first king was Faysal bin Hussein, son of Sharif Hussein of Mecca, who led the Arab revolt against the Ottoman Empire. Faysal ruled Iraq as King Faysal I and was succeeded by his son, Ghazi (1933-1939). Ghazi was succeeded by his son, Faysal II, who ruled until the military coup of Abd al-Karim al-Qasim in 1958. During 1958-1968, Iraq had a succession of military governments, with a brief period of Baathist rule during 1963. The Baath Party regained power in 1968, and Saddam Hussein became the second most powerful leader of Iraq as Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council. Iraq’s President, Ahmad Hasan al-Bakr, resigned at Saddam’s urging, and Saddam became President of Iraq on July 17, 1979. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had 1 See Eisenstadt, Michael and Eric Mathewson, eds. U.S. Policy in Post-Saddam Iraq: Lessons From the British Experience. The Washington Institute for Near East Policy, 2003. CRS-2 survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, 2 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. CRS-3 including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.3 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency. Bahr al-Ulum “suspended” his Council membership following the August 29, 2003, bombing in Najaf that killed a major Shiite figure; see below.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. militaryoffensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003 to disarm independent militias. 3 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-4 Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He is president of the Council during the month of September 2003. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and Talabani were part of the major party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh CRS-5 Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal.4 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.5 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.6 U.S. officials said in August that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck bombings (see below). Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO). Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- 4 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” New York Times, December 6, 2002. 5 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. 6 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post, September 7, 2003. CRS-6 Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community. Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al- Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29 bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing; U.S. forces have not moved to disarm or combat these militiamen. A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. CRS-7 occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hossein Khomeini, who is about 45, relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Khomeini is believed to be an opponent of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also considered a rival of SCIRI. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari was the first to take that post. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as CRS-8 a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, and Isaac Fayadh. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking CRS-9 to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).7 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al- Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, 7 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-10 Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. CRS-11 Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air- power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated byChalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination after Saddam Hussein is removed from power. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former CRS-12 Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven- party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC CRS-13 distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.8 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.9 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.10 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of 8 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. Program. March 2, 2001. 9 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food 10 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, CRS-14 civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.11 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.12 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in earlyOctober 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab- Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. 11 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 12 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-15 The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. (On September 19, 2003, President Bush, in response to a journalist’s question, said there is no evidence linking Saddam Hussein’s regime to the September 11 attacks but there is evidence linking that regime to Al Qaeda.) Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.13 (See section above on Ansar al-Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to 13 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-16 gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. CRS-17 In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC. Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,14 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. 14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-18 ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil, a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq. As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.16 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official 15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 16 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-19 Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The assembled groups did not declare a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (A member from each of the six groups is on the Governing Council.) Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7, 2003) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this CRS-20 view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. Post-War Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a “classic guerrilla war.” Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on U.S. and international funding for humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.) Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how CRS-21 the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in earlyApril 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from that deadline. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. This process was cut short in May 2003 when the Bush Administration decided it would not produce an acceptable Iraqi government. In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The major parties later criticized the U.S. decision in May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) began tilting back toward the views of the major Iraqi parties. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days and would not be purely advisory. He said it would nominate ministryheads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.17 The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. (He 17 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-22 suspended his participation following the August 29 car bombing in Najaf; see below.) The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al- Hashimi, a Shiite woman. (Hashimi was seriously wounded in an assassination attempt on September 20, 2003.) Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members, Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party was the first chairman, and Chalabi is chair for September 2003. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure. Among its first actions, the Council authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Council helped develop a plan, announced September 21, 2003, to open Iraq’s economy to foreign investment and many of its companies to foreign ownership. Press reports in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities are pressing the Governing Council to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political CRS-23 decision-making, although some Council members say that the Council cannot do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.18 New Cabinet. The Council has completed work on a governmental structure. On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, “foreign minister” Hoshyar Zibari, is a close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. Longtime PUK activist Abdul-Latif Rashid is the “minister” of water resources. No “defense minister” was named. The “interior minister” is Nuri Badran, an INA activist. Badran is attempting to build on the INA’s contacts among ex-Baathists and ex-military people to develop a new domestic intelligence and national police network,19 although recruitment of such categories of Iraqis might raise suspicions of other Governing Council members, such as Ahmad Chalabi. Chalabi has been the most vocal of all major post-Saddam figures in calling for the complete dismissal and isolation of all those with ties to the former regime. Prospects for Elections. The Bush Administration has hailed the formation of the Council and the cabinet as major steps toward restoring Iraq’s sovereignty. Other major benchmarks will be the drafting of a constitution and the holding of national elections, which the Bush Administration is saying might be held by mid- 2004. The Administration has linked the potential length of the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25- person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. Some want an appointed constitutional drafting commission, while others, including Ayatollah Sistani, say the drafters should be elected. The timetable for these steps might be affected by the debate between the United States and its allies over the structure of international participation in post-war Iraq (see below). As part of the governance planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.20 However, the State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post-war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.21 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that 18 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003. 19 Williams, Daniel. New Ministry to Recruit Paramilitary Force in Iraq. Washington Post, September 2, 2003. 20 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 21 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-24 discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about 145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel and 11,000 are British (with 1,200 more British troops deploying as of September 8, 2003). There are another approximately 10,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004. The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least five sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation Ivy Serpent (begun July 12, ongoing). Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed about 70 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with car/truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. CRS-25 The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent sweep operations. Resistance attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there were at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces in August 2003 in the Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. Suggesting a mix of nationalist and Islamist factions, they are using such names as: ! Al Awda (the Return) ! the Snakes ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement) ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad ! Black Banners Group ! Nasirite Organization ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led byShaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.22 This represents the possible emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. 22 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-26 The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. U.S. officials say that the continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations in Iraq; the United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for military operations there, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. (“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.” August 8, 2003. At [http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq, the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the security function from the United States. However, there are concerns about the loyalty and dedication of the new recruits, in the absence of Iraqi sovereignty and a clearly defined governing structure. Some Iraqi forces have fought crime and the resistance and helped put down protests, but others have sometimes abandoned their posts and allowed their facilities to be attacked. The United States is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn CRS-27 policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 40,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, more than half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.23 (Kerik announced his resignation in early September 2003.) The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all-Iraqi civil defense force to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. Press reports in late August said many Iraqi security personnel might be flown to Hungary for training there. Despite its complaints about lack of authority, the five major parties on the Council - the INC, the INA, SCIRI, the PUK, and the KDP - appear to be trying to move ahead on assuming more responsibility for security, apart from the institutions being established by the CPA. The five are reportedly pressing the United States to allow Iraqi militias, most of which are controlled by these five parties, to play a greater role in maintaining security and for U.S. forces in Iraq to largely withdraw from street patrols into garrisons.24 Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.25 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed in late July 2003. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been 23 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times, July 18, 2003. 24 Tyler, Patrick. Iraqi Factions Seek to Take Over Security Duties. New York Times, September 20, 2003. 25 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-28 concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. However, exports are running at only about 800,000 barrels per day as of late September 2003, due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the planned levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, because oil revenues are about half of what was projected, the budget deficit is likely to be more than $4 billion, far more than the $2.2 billion projected deficit in the budget. The higher deficit means that the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below), might run out of money by the end of 2003. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Supplemental Funding Needs. Partly because oil revenues are lagging behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for FY2004 for the “war on terrorism,” in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq. The supplemental request asks for the following for Iraq reconstruction: ! $2.1 billion for border enforcement and other security functions, ! $2.1 billion for establishing Iraqi security and civil defense institutions, ! $900 million for justice and civil society development, ! $6 billion for electricity infrastructure rehabilitation, ! $2.1 billion for rehabilitating the energy infrastructure, ! $3.7 billion to repair water and sewage systems, ! $900 million for water conservation facilities, CRS-29 ! $800 million for repair of transportation and telecommunications infrastructure, ! $500 million to upgrade housing, roads, and bridges, ! $900 million to construct and equip hospitals and clinics, and ! $300 million for jobs training and private sector initiatives. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance26 The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing resistance that is causing continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. In his speech on Iraq of September 7, 2003, President Bush said he has authorized Secretary of State Powell to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq. It is hoped that such a U.N. authorization would trigger 26 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction. CRS-30 additional pledges of force contributions, which could allow the United States to withdraw more of its troops. Thus far, 30 countries have made commitments of forces to help secure Iraq, but the commitments of several large nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be contingent on U.N. authorization. Administration discussions about requesting additional foreign participation began earlier than the President’s September 7 speech. Secretary of State Powell said on July 16, 2003, that the United States is discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force. Discussions within the Administration and between the United States and some of its allies on a U.N. resolution that might specifically authorize a multinational force accelerated following the August 19 U.N. headquarters bombing. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August 2003 that one idea under discussion could be for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, which would be commanded by a U.S. military official.27 This option appears to still be under consideration, as are others. The Administration has argued that the peacekeeping function is already multilateral. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003, and there are now about 21,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 11,000 British), as of September 9, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1. 27 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times, August 28, 2003. CRS-31 Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 El Salvador 300 Estonia 55 Georgia 100 Honduras 300 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 (mostly military police) Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support). (Implementation placed on hold after U.N. HQ bombing ) Latvia 150 Lithuania 85 Macedonia 28 Mongolia 200 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 300 Norway 150 Philippines 500 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 150 Slovakia 85 South Korea 700 (mostly medical) Spain 1,300 Thailand 500 Ukraine 1650 Total Pledged 17,100 CRS-32 Another idea said to be under discussion is for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States has had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) Other countries have agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the following countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom ($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6 million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2 million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and Italy ($22.4 million). A donors’ conference is to be held in the coming weeks, although some countries are said to be reluctant to make new pledges until there is agreement on a new structure for foreign participation in Iraq. The Administration is reportedly hoping for $10 billion in new contributions, but outside experts say pledges will likely come in well below that figure. U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a modest U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. Some countries criticized Resolution 1483 as providing for too limited a U.N. role in post-war Iraq and said that the United Nations, not the United States and Britain, should take the lead role in establishing a post-war governing structure for Iraq. The Administration opposed giving the United Nations the lead role in governance, partly on the grounds that the United Nations might facilitate the rise to power in Iraq of a government that is not to U.S. liking. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution did not appear to meet the requirements of France and others for them to donate peacekeeping forces. CRS-33 As of late September, the United States is still circulating working papers to other Security Council countries that it hopes will encourage greater foreign troop contributions and donations. However, some countries, including France and Germany, have said that their key interest is that any new U.N. resolution restructure post-war governance into a U.N.-led operation rather than a U.S.-led operation. France, in particular, is pushing a plan that would greatly accelerate the transfer of power to an Iraqi-led government, perhaps in as few as several weeks. France also has said the U.S.-led CPA should be dismantled as part of a process of shifting Iraq from an occupation to an international reconstruction operation. The Bush Administration has said that France’s idea for a rapid transfer of authority to Iraqis is unrealistic, and the Bush Administration reportedly is still unwilling to cede to the United Nations the lead role in post-war governance. Fate of the Deposed Regime An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of late September 2003, 43 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 CRS-34 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” CRS-35 As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. CRS-36 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 9 September 2003 — RL31339_2003-09-09.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated September 9, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to verifiably abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assemblythat unless Iraq fullydisarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime failed because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping security services. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council and subsequent appointment of a cabinet will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq. Escalating resistance, punctuated by the August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N. headquarters in Baghdad, has contributed to an Administration decision to try to enlist increased foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction. See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The Governing Council and Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 New Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . 23 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has sought to remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency. Bahr al-Ulum “suspended” his Council membership following the August 29, 2003, bombing in Najaf that killed a major Shiite figure; see below.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he was single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he might not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003 to disarm independent militias. Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. He is president of the Council during the month of September 2003. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but CRS-4 Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and Talabani were part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters, mostly of Arab origin, who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal.3 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi 3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some recent press accounts say Iran might have him in custody.5 U.S. officials said in August that some Ansar fighters, possibly at the direction of Zarqawi, might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism such as recent car/truck bombings (see below). Ansar al-Islam is not listed by the State Department as Foreign Terrorist Organization (FTO). Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community. Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. 4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. 5 Finn, Peter and Susan Schmidt. Al Qaeda Plans a Front in Iraq. Washington Post, September 7, 2003. CRS-6 In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Brigades” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Brigades are headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al- Aziz has taken over the leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Brigades, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance; the Brigades fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. Asserting that the United States failed to create a secure environment that might have prevented the August 29 bombing that killed Ayatollah Al Hakim, Brigade fighters have deployed throughout Najaf since the bombing; U.S. forces have not moved to disarm or combat these militiamen. A variety of press reports say that some other individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Brigades. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim said he was for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine-person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45, relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent CRS-7 of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also considered a rival of SCIRI and whom some SCIRI activists blamed for a bombing on August 24 outside the home of elder Hakim cleric Mohammad Saeed Al Hakim. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abd al Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari was the first to take that post. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be personal and ideological linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often attempted to link release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as a movement separate from Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. CRS-8 Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. Other senior clerics include Ayatollah Mohammad Sa’id Al Hakim, uncle of the slain SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr, and Isaac Fayadh. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, whom Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Islamic Amal. Another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization has traditionally been allied with SCIRI. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent CRS-9 opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).6 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al- Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. 6 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-10 Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air- power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated byChalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the CRS-11 George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. No specific language in the Act provides for its termination if Saddam Hussein is removed from power. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven- party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 CRS-12 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control CRS-13 would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.7 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.8 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.9 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush 7 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. 8 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 9 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. CRS-14 Administration.10 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.11 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001, attacks, stressing regime change and asserting that containment was inadequate. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in earlyOctober 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11, 2001 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab- Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and 10 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 11 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-15 promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al- Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.12 (See section above on Ansar al- Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not 12 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-16 have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains CRS-17 between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC. Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,13 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil, a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early 1980s. 13 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-18 ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq. As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.14 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.15 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as 14 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 15 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-19 SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The assembled groups did not declare a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (All six groups are on the Governing Council.) Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. CRS-20 The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace and costs of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. Post-War Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, other Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a “classic guerrilla war.” Some experts believe that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For further information on U.S. and international funding for humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.) Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how the pace and the means to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials, including deputyDefense SecretaryPaul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from that deadline. CRS-21 Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics, boycotted and called for an Islamic state. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The “seven- party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.16 The Governing Council and Cabinet. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muhammadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. (He suspended his participation following the August 29 car bombing in Najaf; see below.) The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. 16 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-22 The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al- Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party was the first chairman, and Chalabi is chair for September 2003. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure. Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Governing Council has begun some work on a new constitution. On July 17, 2003, CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to have national elections by summer of 2004, and he has linked the potential length of the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration of security in Iraq. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. Some want an appointed constitutional drafting commission while others, including Ayatollah Sistani, say the drafters should be elected. Press reports in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities are pressing the Governing Council to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political CRS-23 decision-making, although some Council members say that the Council cannot do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.17 At the end of August 2003, the Council was reported to be negotiating among its members on the formation of a cabinet composed of about 25 ministries.18 New Cabinet. On September 3, 2003, a 25-member cabinet was sworn in. Its composition has roughly the same factional and ethnic balance of the Council itself. Two “ministers” — Ibrahim Bahr al-Ulum (oil ministry) and Ali al-Alawi (trade ministry) — are close relatives of Council members. Another, foreign minister Hoshyar Zibari, is a close aide to KDP chief Masud Barzani. As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.19 However, the State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.20 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally- displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity- building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about 145,000 U.S. and British troops are in Iraq; of those, about 130,000 are U.S. personnel and 11,000 are British (with 1,200 more British troops deploying as of September 8, 2003). There are another approximately 10,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appear to have made that goal untenable, and some press reports say 17 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003. 18 Williams, Daniel. Iraqis Set to Expand Cabinet. Washington Post, August 27, 2003. 19 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 20 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-24 that Defense Department officials estimate that over 100,000 U.S. troops might still be in Iraq in the summer of 2004. The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted at least five sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation Ivy Serpent (begun July 12, ongoing). Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed about 70 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with car/truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29, 2003, car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed over 100 persons, according to news reports. The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. U.S. military officials say they have arrested about 200 foreign fighters in recent sweep operations. Resistance attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there were at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces in August 2003 in the Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using such names as: ! Al Awda (the Return) ! the Snakes ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect CRS-25 ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement) ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad ! Black Banners Group ! Nasirite Organization ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibilityfor U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.21 This represents the possible emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as symbols of the international presence, including U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to cause international relief workers to leave Iraq, slow reconstruction, and turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. U.S. officials say that the continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations in Iraq; the United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for military operations there, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. (“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.” August 8, 2003. At [http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. 21 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-26 Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq, the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the security function from the United States. The United States is in the process of training recruits for a planned 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.22 (Kerik announced his resignation in early September 2003.) The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all- Iraqi civil defense force to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. Press reports in late August said many Iraqi security personnel might be flown to Hungary for training there. Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) 22 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-27 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.23 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed in late July 2003. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that has run Iraq’s oil ministry and reported to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. However, exports are running at about 700,000 barrels per day as of early September 2003, due to sabotage and the slow pace of sector reconstruction; this is significantly below estimates. Iraq’s pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq for calendar 2003, which is based on the targeted levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.5 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. However, because oil revenues are behind projections, the budget deficit is likely to be more than $4 billion, far more than the $2.2 billion projected deficit in the budget. The higher deficit means that the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below), might run out of money by the end of 2003. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Supplemental Funding Needs. However, partly because oil revenues are lagging behind projections, in late August 2003 Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. On September 8, 2003, President Bush stated that he would request supplemental funding for the “war on terrorism,” 23 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-28 in the amount of $87 billion, of which over $70 billion would be for military operations in and reconstruction of Iraq. Of that amount, about $50 billion would be for military costs and about $20 billion for reconstruction of Iraq. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance24 The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing resistance that is causing continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. In his speech on Iraq of September 7, 2003, President Bush said he has authorized Secretary of State Powell to negotiate a Security Council resolution that would authorize a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq. It is hoped that such a U.N. authorization would trigger additional pledges of force contributions. Thus far, 29 countries have made commitments of forces to help secure Iraq, but the commitments of several large 24 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction. CRS-29 nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be contingent on U.N. authorization. Administration discussions about requesting additional foreign participation began earlier than the President’s September 7 speech. Secretary of State Powell said on July 16, 2003, that the United States is discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force. Discussions within the Administration and between the United States and some of its allies on a U.N. resolution that might specifically authorize a multinational force accelerated following the August 19 U.N. headquarters bombing. U.N. Secretary General said on August 21 that there is no discussion of establishing a U.N.-led peacekeeping force. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August that one idea under discussion could be for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, which would be commanded by a U.S. military official.25 This option appears to still be under consideration, as are others. The United Kingdom and Poland are leading multinational divisions in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003, and there are now about 21,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 11,000 British), as of September 9, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1. 25 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times, August 28, 2003. CRS-30 Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 El Salvador 300 Estonia 55 Georgia 100 Honduras 300 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 (mostly military police) Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support). (Implementation placed on hold after U.N. HQ bombing ) Latvia 150 Lithuania 85 Macedonia 28 Mongolia 200 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 300 Norway 150 Philippines 500 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 150 Slovakia 85 South Korea 700 (mostly medical) Spain 1,300 Thailand 500 Ukraine 1650 Total Pledged 17,100 CRS-31 Another idea said to be under discussion is for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States has had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. (For more information on this possibility, see CRS Report RL32068, An Enhanced European Role in Iraq?) Other countries have agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the following countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom ($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6 million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2 million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and Italy ($22.4 million). A donors’ conference is to be held in the coming weeks, although some countries are said to be reluctant to make new pledges until there is agreement on a new structure for foreign participation in Iraq. U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a modest U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provided for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. Some countries criticized Resolution 1483 as providing for too limited a U.N. role in post-war Iraq and said that the United Nations, not the United States and Britain, should take the lead role in establishing a post-war governing structure for Iraq. The Administration opposed giving the United Nations the lead role in governance, partly on the grounds that the United Nations might facilitate the rise to power in Iraq of a government that is not to U.S. liking. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution, Resolution 1500, that “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution did not appear to meet the requirements of France and others for them to donate peacekeeping forces. As of September 9, the United States is circulating a working paper to other Security Council countries that it hopes will encourage greater foreign troop CRS-32 contributions. However, some countries, including France and Germany, have said that their keyinterest is that anynew U.N. resolution restructure post-war governance into a U.N.-led operation rather than a U.S.-led operation. Others, such as Russia, have indicated they are less concerned on this issue than France or Germany.26 Fate of the Deposed Regime An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of early September 2003, 42 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). 26 Isachenkov, Vladimir. Russia May Send Peacekeepers to Iraq. Moscow Times, September 5, 2003. CRS-33 A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force CRS-34 against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, particularly in light of the Administration’s September 2003 request for an additional $87 billion in funding, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. CRS-35 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 29 August 2003 — RL31339_2003-08-29.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated August 29, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq. Escalating resistance, punctuated by the August 19, 2003, truck bombing of the U.N. headquarters in Baghdad, has apparently prompted debate within the Administration over how to enlist increased foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction. See also CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 12 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority . . . . . . 23 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Supplemental Funding Needs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has sought to change remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias. Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform CRS-4 assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and Talabani were part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaikh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaikh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal.3 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly 3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some press accounts in July 2003 say Iran might have him in custody. U.S. officials said in August that some Ansar fighters might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation, possibly including organizing acts of terrorism. Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, died in a car bomb by unknown assailants in Najaf on August 29, 2003, an act that could reflect or accelerate a schism within the Shiite Islamist community. Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Baqr Al Hakim had returned to Iraq on May 10, 2003, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. Abd al-Aziz is likely to take leadership of the movement in the wake of his elder brother’s death on 4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-6 August 29. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al- Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine- person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45, relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also considered a rival of SCIRI and whom some SCIRI activists blamed for a bombing on August 24 outside the home of elder Hakim cleric Mohammad Saeed Al Hakim. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now CRS-7 been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari is the first to take that post. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al- Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation, although he has thus far stopped short of openly CRS-8 calling for armed attacks on American forces. He is openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, who Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was CRS-9 repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al- Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, 5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-10 then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air- power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December CRS-11 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven- party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. CRS-12 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. 6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. CRS-13 Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.7 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of 7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. CRS-14 humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al- Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 (See section above on Ansar al- Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical 10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. 11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-15 weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths CRS-16 in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite CRS-17 Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi, this group was close to the INC. Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003, that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil, a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq. 12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-18 As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq, and formed, against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, a six-seat committee to prepare for a transition regime. The assembled groups did not declare a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (All six groups of these personalities, or their designated representatives, are on Governing Council.) Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi 13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 14 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-19 disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount CRS-20 of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. Post-War Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a “classic guerrilla war.” Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For information on U.S. and international funding for humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.) Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule authority. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The “seven- CRS-21 party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The seven-party grouping subsequently began meeting with U.S. occupation authorities to try to reverse that decision. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.15 The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al- Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who 15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-22 heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party is the first chairman. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure. Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It empowered a three-member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition; Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Governing Council has begun some work on a new constitution. On July 17, 2003, CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to have national elections by summer of 2004, and he has linked the potential length of the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration of security in Iraq. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. Press reports in late August 2003 said that U.S. authorities are pressing the Governing Council to take a more prominent and public role in post-war political decision-making, although some Council members say that the Council cannot do so unless and until the U.S.-led coalition begins transferring greater authority to it.16 Some Council members visited the Gulf monarchy states in August 2003 to expand the Council’s regional profile. At the end of August 2003, the Council was reported to be negotiating among its members on the formation of a cabinet composed of about 25 ministries.17 As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.18 However, the State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department 16 Filkins, Dexter and Neil MacFarquhar. U.S. Official Tells Iraqis To Assert More Authority. New York Times, August 21, 2003. 17 Williams, Daniel. Iraqis Set to Expand Cabinet. Washington Post, August 27, 2003. 18 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. CRS-23 was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.19 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally- displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity- building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about 150,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq; of those, about 140,000 are U.S. personnel and 11,000 are British. There are another approximately 10,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable. The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. U.S. forces have conducted five sweep operations since mid-June 2003 to search for Baath and other oppositionists; these operations were given the names Peninsula Strike (June 9-15); Desert Scorpion (June 15-August 1); Operation Sidewinder (June 29-July 7); Operation Soda Mountain (July 12-17); and Operation Ivy Serpent (begun July 12, ongoing). The new Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed about 65 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. An apparent terrorist component to the resistance emerged in August 2003 with car/truck bombings in Baghdad of the embassy of Jordan (August 7) and U.N. headquarters at the Canal Hotel (August 19). The latter bombing killed 23 persons including the U.N. representative in Iraq, Sergio Vieira de Mello, and prompted some drawdown in U.N. and non-governmental organization personnel in Iraq. The August 29 car bombing in Najaf that killed Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim may have killed as many as 100 persons, according to news reports. 19 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-24 The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have been at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces in August 2003 in the Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. The resistance appears to be operating in relatively small cells, some of which have broadcast photos of armed fighters. Resistance factions have begun identifying themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using such names as: ! Al Awda (the Return) ! the Snakes ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement) ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad ! Black Banners Group ! Nasirite Organization ! Armed Vanguard of the Second Mohammad Army. Claimed responsibility for U.N. headquarters bombing and threatened attacks on any Arab countries that participate in Iraq peacekeeping. The credibility of the claim is not known. As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaikh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.20 This represents the possible emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are 20 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-25 cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities, as well as the Jordan Embassy and U.N. headquarters. By attacking these targets, the resistance appears to be hoping to slow reconstruction and thereby turn the Iraqi populace against the occupation. U.S. officials say that the continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations in Iraq; the United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for military operations there, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet, and that life is, for the most part, returning to normal throughout Iraq. (“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.” August 8, 2003. At [http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12, 2003, to head the CPA, which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high-level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore security to Iraq, the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.21 The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000-man, all-Iraqi 21 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times, (continued...) CRS-26 civil defense force to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. Press reports in late August said many Iraqi security personnel might be flown to Hungary for training there. Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) The Oil Industry/Revenues for Reconstruction.22 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed in late July. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Then presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. In late July, Iraq contracted to sell oil, about 750,000 barrels per day, slightly below the target rate. Its pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. However, sabotage by the resistance has reduced Iraq’s oil exports to about 600,000 barrels per 21 (...continued) July 18, 2003. 22 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-27 day as of August 18, 2003, below the 1 million barrel per day target figure, a development that is apparently jeopardizing budgetary projections. The CPA- produced budget for Iraq, which is based on the targeted levels of oil exports, assumed that oil revenues would yield about $3.6 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. The deficit is to be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below). Supplemental Funding Needs. However, in late August Bremer visited Washington to talk to other Administration officials about the need to ask Congress for immediate supplemental funds for reconstruction needs, which Bremer estimates will run into the “several tens of billions” over the next year. One press report said that the Administration might ask for about $2 billion - $3 billion in additional funds for reconstruction for the short term.23 A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured 23 Seized Iraqi Funds All But Gone, U.S. Says. Los Angeles Times, August 27, 2003. CRS-28 Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance24 The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing security difficulties and continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other countries is proceeding for a possible U.N.-authorized multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq that would spread more of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden now borne mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries have made commitments or are discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force. The countries listed below have begun implementing pledges of troops and or police or support personnel. The commitments of several nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be contingent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force, and several nations appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate. Secretary of State Powell said on July 16, 2003, that the United States is discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force. Discussions within the Administration and between the United States and some of its allies on a U.N. resolution that might specifically authorize a multinational force accelerated following the August 19 U.N. headquarters bombing. U.N. Secretary General said on August 21 that there is no discussion of establishing a U.N.-led peacekeeping force. Deputy Secretary of State Richard Armitage told journalists in late August that one idea under discussion could be for a multinational force, under U.N. leadership, which would be commanded by a U.S. military official.25 The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003, and there are now about 21,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 11,000 British), as of August 18, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1. 24 For additional information on international contributions to Iraq peacekeeping and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31843. Iraq: Foreign Contributions to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Peacekeeping Operations, and Post-War Reconstruction. 25 Jehl, Douglas. U.S. Now Signals It Might Consider U.N. Force in Iraq. New York Times, August 28, 2003. Table 1. CRS-29 Multinational Division Force Pledges Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 El Salvador 300 Estonia 55 Georgia 100 Honduras 300 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 (mostly military police) Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support). (Implementation placed on hold after U.N. HQ bombing ) Latvia 150 Lithuania 85 Macedonia 28 Mongolia 200 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 300 Norway 150 Philippines 500 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 150 Slovakia 85 South Korea 700 (mostly medical) Spain 1,300 Thailand 500 Ukraine 1650 Total Pledged 17,100 CRS-30 Another idea said to be under discussion is for NATO to command a multilateral force. The United States has had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. However, on July 17, NATO secretary general George Robertson said the body had no plans for a greater role beyond providing logistical help to the Polish-led force in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. Other countries have agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the following countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom ($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6 million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2 million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and Italy ($22.4 million). U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed de Mello (see above) for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted above, some countries are conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to Iraq on a formal U.N. authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be weighing, as well as elevation in U.N. authority over post-war governance and nation building in Iraq. As noted above, the bombing of U.N. headquarters on August 19 has intensified discussions between the United States and its allies on whether to expand U.N. authority in Iraq. Some in the Administration oppose doing so, partly on the grounds that the United Nations might facilitate the rise to power in Iraq of a government that is not to U.S. liking. Others believe the United States must share authority with the United Nations if the United States is to be able to wind down the occupation of Iraq. The World Bank, which visited Iraq in late July 2003, said it would resume lending to Iraq after it conducts national elections. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution. The Resolution, 1500, “welcomed,” but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq.” The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over CRS-31 post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution did not appear to meet the requirements of France and others for them to donate peacekeeping forces. Fate of the Deposed Regime An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (captured August 21, 2003); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime (captured August 19, 2003); Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (captured May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of mid-August 2003, about 45 of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or were killed. Others not on the list of 55 have been apprehended as well: Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, CRS-32 focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). CRS-33 The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. Others have called for an increase in the number of U.S. troops in Iraq or re-evaluation of the mix of U.S. forces to ensure that the skill set of the U.S. force matches the needs of reconstruction. CRS-34 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 18 August 2003 — RL31339_2003-08-18.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated August 18, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be risky and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq. Continuing resistance and the slow pace of reconstruction have apparently prompted debate within the Administration over how to enlist increased foreign participation in post-war peacekeeping and reconstruction. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 The First ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Continued Doubts About the Capabilitiesof the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 11 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Resistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Fate of the Deposed Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has sought to change remove Iraq’s Saddam Hussein from power since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, drove Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council, inaugurated July 13, 2003, and both are part of its nine member rotating presidency.) Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States (M.I.T) as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance (embezzlement) and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. The Jordanian government subsequently repaid depositors a total of $400 million. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq and subsequent occupation. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq, later deploying to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for fugitive members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May2003 to disarm independent militias. Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that began meeting shortly prior to the 2003 war. The seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the Governing Council. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine that will rotate its presidency. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book, Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq, detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. In August 2003, Makiya was tapped by the Governing Council to head a 25-person committee that will decide how to draft a new constitution. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, among the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform CRS-4 assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both Barzani and Talabani were part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the Governing Council, and both are part of the Council’s rotating presidency. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly associated itself with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who had fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 600 fighters in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal.3 Ansar fighters clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the December 1999 millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar to Saddam Hussein’s regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Although Zarqawi reportedly 3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 received medical treatment in Baghdad in May 2002 after fleeing Afghanistan, many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some press accounts in July 2003 say Iran might have him in custody. U.S. officials said in August that some Ansar fighters might have remained in or re-entered Iraq and are participating in the resistance to the U.S. occupation. Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. The United States sought to work with some Shiite Islamist opposition factions during the 1990s but had few if any contacts with others. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. He returned to Iraq on May 10, welcomed by crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in 4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-6 southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the rest have since entered Iraq. A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance, although it was part of the INC and did have contacts with the United States prior to the 2003 war effort. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the same time publicly opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al- Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He later helped constitute the seven-party core of the Governing Council, and Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine- person rotating Council presidency. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45, relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Al Sadr (see below), who is also considered a rival of SCIRI. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari is the first to take that post. CRS-7 The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. The Sadr clan, based in Iraq during Saddam Hussein’s rule, was repressed and not politically active during that time. The United States had no contact with this grouping prior to the 2003 war and did not attempt to enlist it in any overthrow efforts during 1991-2002. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada Al Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the poorer Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping has not been included in the Governing Council. Moqtada has used his Friday prayer sermons in Najaf and other forums to denounce the Council as a puppet of the U.S. occupation. In July 2003, Moqtada and his aides began recruiting for an Islamic army, for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge the U.S. occupation with force. He is also openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. In August 2003, Shiites in Basra and in Baghdad rioted against British and U.S. occupation forces over fuel shortages and perceived slights, and there was speculation that Moqtada was helping fuel the riots. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, was repressed during Saddam’s rule and is emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. The United States had no contact with Sistani when Saddam was in power. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead CRS-8 the Najaf- based “Hawza al-Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. Sistani and the Hawza are generally allied with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle, seeking to contain Moqtada Al Sadr, who Sistani and SCIRI both view as radical and impulsive. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that onlyelected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq in April 2003, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by CRS-9 renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al- Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in Iraq. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Alawi was part of the seven-party grouping that became the core of the Governing Council, and Alawi has been named a member of that Council and one of its nine-member rotating presidency. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an 5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-10 FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act A clear indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriation, P.L. 108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National SecurityCouncil official on counter- terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) CRS-11 The First ILA Designations. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM, which was an original designee of eligibility to receive assistance under the ILA, is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (he is a cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali, who is about 47 and was a banker in London, claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort, although it was part of the INC and the United States had contacts with it. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven- party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the CRS-12 opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical about the opposition’s capabilities. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist 6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. CRS-13 regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.7 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the 7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. CRS-14 ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al- Zarqawi had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 (See section above on Ansar al- Islam for more information on that organization and its reputed links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.) Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. 10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. 11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-15 Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little evidence of actual WMD have thus far been found, although the CRS-16 Administration asserts that WMD programs, and perhaps actual weapons themselves, will eventually be found in Iraq. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which reportedly tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact during this period include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); and Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated in the post-1991 Gulf war anti-Saddam uprisings. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salh, this group was close to the INC. Salhi, who defected in 1995, served in the Republican Guard. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was established in August 2002, headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s CRS-17 military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party. It is headed by Jamil Wakil, a follower of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB, see above under Islamic Amal). The IFLB allegedly attempted to overthrow Bahrain’s regime in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the Governing Council.) Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by the ex-military led groups to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq. As a decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination (December 9, 2002) to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration made six of the ex-military led factions discussed above (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, 12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-18 possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq. Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. (All six groups of these personalities, or their designated representatives, are on Governing Council.) Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. In a probable effort to garner international support for any U.S.-led war effort against Iraq, the Administration had downplayed the goal of regime change in President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, stressing instead the need to enforce U.N. resolutions that required Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2003 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March 2003 breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic 13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 14 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-19 Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. CRS-20 Post-War Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a “classic guerrilla war.” Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under the control of pro-Iranian Shiite Islamist forces who are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have been under-represented in every Iraqi government since modern Iraq’s formation in 1920. (For information on U.S. and international funding for humanitarian assistance and reconstruction, see CRS Report RL31833, Iraq: Recent Developments in Humanitarian and Reconstruction Assistance.) Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that U.S. forces will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how to move Iraq to self-government. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May2003, U.S. officials, apparentlyfearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule authority. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, ending in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. In parallel with the April 26 meeting, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. On May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Shiite Islamist Da’wa Party. The “seven- party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead form an advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The seven-party grouping subsequently began meeting with U.S. occupation authorities to try to reverse that decision. CRS-21 With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25- to 30-member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.15 The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al- Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. 15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-22 A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party is the first chairman. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure. Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It also has empowered a three member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition. The grouping, Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Governing Council is working on a new constitution. On July 17, 2003, CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to have national elections by summer of 2004. He has linked the potential length of the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration of security in Iraq. As noted above, in early August 2003, the Governing Council tapped INC activist Kanaan Makiya to head a 25-person committee that will determine the process for drafting the constitution. As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.16 However, the State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.17 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally- displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity- building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. 16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 17 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-23 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about 160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Of those, about 148,000 are U.S. personnel and 11,000 are British. There are another approximately10,000 foreign forces, deploying in accordance with international commitments to post-war peacekeeping (see below). Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable, and some U.S. commanders do not rule out an increase in U.S. force levels if necessary. The Resistance. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks and the type and geographical distribution of attacks. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. The new Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed 60 U.S. militarypersonnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers, possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda, who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere, but there have been at least two fatal attacks on British and Danish forces in August 2003 in the Shiite areas in and around Basra. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule or the goal of forming an Islamic state. Other resistance fighters appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. In June 2003, some opponents of the occupation began identifying themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using such names as: ! Al Awda (the Return); ! the Snakes; ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect; ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq; CRS-24 ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement): and ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. ! Jaysh (Army) of Mohammad ! Black Banners Group ! Nasirite Organization As noted above, some Shiite factions are becoming more active against the occupation. The Sadr faction has reportedly instigated riots and demonstrations that took place against U.S. and British forces in Baghdad and Basra. One report says that Sunni Islamists, led by Shaykh Ahmad Qubaysi, who returned in April 2003 from exile in the UAE, is assisting the Sadr faction.18 This represents the possible emergence of a Sunni-Shiite Islamist anti-occupation coalition. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States. In August 2003, in a possible evolution of its tactics, resistance fighters stepped up their attacks on Iraqi oil export pipelines and water and other infrastructure facilities. In addition, U.S. officials say that the continued resistance has raised the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations in Iraq; the United States is spending about $3.9 billion per month for military operations there, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, the Administration maintains that reconstruction is proceeding apace and has logged a number of major accomplishments, as discussed in a White House fact sheet. (“White House Notes Successful Results of Iraq Liberation.” August 8, 2003. At [http://www.usinfo.state.gov/xarchives].) The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head the Coalition Provisional Authority(CPA), which subsumed ORHA. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort and denied it was an indication of high- level dissatisfaction with the effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an 18 Shadid, Anthony. Iraqi Clerics Unite in Rare Alliance. Washington Post, August 17, 2003. CRS-25 occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq, the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.19 The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000 man, all- Iraqi civil defense force to guard installations such as oil pumping stations, electricity substations, and like facilities. Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein, including evidence of WMD. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed by a U.S. military commander (Maj. Gen. Keith Dayton) but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged WMD. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some contain some of the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (WMD issues and the fate of the missing Kuwaitis are discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) Reviving the Oil Industry.20 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Ambassador Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed in late July. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 19 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times, July 18, 2003. 20 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-26 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. In late July, Iraq contracted to sell oil, about 750,000 barrels per day, slightly below the target rate. Its pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees had hoped to reach by late 2003. However, sabotage by the resistance has reduced Iraq’s oil exports to about 600,000 barrels per day as of August 18, 2003, significantly below the 1 million barrel per day target figure, a development that could jeopardize existing budgetary projections. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq, which is based on the targeted levels of oil exports, assumes that oil revenues will yield about $3.6 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. The deficit is to be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below). A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The CRS-27 resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) International Role in Peacekeeping and Governance The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing security difficulties and continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others for the Administration to expand its efforts to enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other countries is proceeding for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq that would presumably spread some of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden now borne mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries are discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force, and the countries listed below have begun implementing pledges of troops and or police or support personnel. The commitments of several nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be contingent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force, and several nations appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate. Secretary of State Powell said on July 16, 2003, that the United States is discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force. The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003, and there are now about 21,000 non-U.S. troops on the ground (including 11,000 British), as of August 18, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those in Table 1. CRS-28 Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 El Salvador 300 Estonia 55 Georgia 100 Honduras 300 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 (mostly military police) Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support) Latvia 150 Lithuania 85 Macedonia 28 Mongolia 200 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 300 Norway 150 Philippines 500 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 150 Slovakia 85 South Korea 700 (mostly medical) Spain 1,300 Ukraine 1650 Total Non-U.S./U.K 16,600 CRS-29 The United States has had some discussions with NATO on whether the organization would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. However, on July 17, NATO secretary general George Robertson said the body had no plans for a greater role beyond providing logistical help to the Polish-led force in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. Other countries have also agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According to the June 30, 2003, report to Congress by the Administration, the following countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom ($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6 million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2 million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and Italy ($22.4 million). U.N. Role in Post-War Iraq. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provided for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The SecretaryGeneral subsequently(May27, 2003) appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted above, some countries are conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to Iraq on a formal U.N. authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be weighing. On the other hand, the Washington Post reported on August 2, 2003, that the Administration did not want to agree to a U.N. resolution that dilutes its prerogatives in Iraq, particularlyits authorityin determining a new political structure. The World Bank, which visited Iraq in late July 2003, said it would resume lending to Iraq after it conducts national elections. On August 14, 2003, the U.N. Security Council adopted a compromise resolution. The Resolution, 1500, welcomed, but did not “endorse,” the formation of the Governing Council, an apparent nod to U.S. requests. The resolution also enhanced U.N. authority in Iraq somewhat by establishing a “U.N. Assistance Mission for Iraq,” which is headed in Iraq by de Mello. The resolution did not formally authorize an international peacekeeping force for Iraq (Resolution 1483 already “calls on” governments to contribute forces for stabilization) and did not measurably dilute U.S. authority over post-war governance in Iraq. The resolution did not appear to meet the requirements of France and others for them to donate peacekeeping forces. CRS-30 Fate of the Deposed Regime An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra, although that is now in question); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of mid-July 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority officials, more than half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are confirmed killed. Among the others apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al- Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical CRS-31 weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in CRS-32 its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. CRS-33 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 4 August 2003 — RL31339_2003-08-04.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated August 4, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament and reduction of support for terrorism; benefits such as liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and promotion of stability and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. Administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and formerly exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq; resistance has killed 54 U.S. soldiers since President Bush declared major combat operations ended on May 1, 2003. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sadr Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Monarchists/Sharif Ali . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 11 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has sought to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003, and had effectively removed Saddam Hussein from power by April 9, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently was shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition was seen as providing a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. (Barzani and Bahr al-Ulum are now on the 25-member post-war Governing Council, and both are part of the nine member rotating presidency of the Council. Ahmad Chalabi. When the INC was formed, its Executive Committee selected Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family, to run the INC on a daily basis. Chalabi was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian government subsequently re- capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe the U.S. presence is needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. After establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi tried to build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi were disbanded following the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias and to temporarily delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book “Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracyfor Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that have been meeting since the period prior to the war. As discussed below, the seven-party leadership grouping was hoping to become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the 25 seat Governing Council unveiled on July 13, 2003. Chalabi is a member of the Governing Council and one of the nine selected to rotate the presidency of the Council. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright CRS-4 independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both the KDP and the PUK are part of the seven-party grouping that has now been incorporated into the official 25-seat U.S.-backed Governing Council unveiled on July 13, 2003. Barzani and Talabani are both part of the nine member rotating presidency of the Council. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000 people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedlyresponsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al- 3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Some press accounts in July 2003 say Iran might have him in custody. Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought 4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-6 alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council on July 13, 2003. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the same time opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has since helped constitute the seven-party grouping that now constitutes a part of the 25-seat Governing Council. Abd al-Aziz is part of the nine-person rotating presidency of the Council. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. SCIRI might get additional support from the family of the late Ayatollah Khomeini. In July 2003, Khomeini’s grandson, Hassan Khomeini, who is about 45, relocated from Qom, Iran to Najaf. Hassan Khomeini is believed to be an opponent of the more militant Shiite clerics such as Moqtada Sadr (see below), who is also considered a rival of SCIRI. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. Jafari is CRS-7 one of the nine members of the Council that is rotating the presidency, and Jafari is the first to take that post. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Movement. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping was not part of the seven-party grouping that has been incorporated into the U.S.-backed Governing Council. Neither Moqtada nor any other known Sadr faction members are on the Governing Council. In July 2003, Sadr began giving sermons in and around Najaf stridently opposing the U.S. occupation, and his aides began recruiting for an “Islamic army,” for now unarmed, that Sadr says must challenge U.S. occupation forces. He is also openly calling for a cleric-led Islamic state similar to that of Iran. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al- Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in CRS-8 the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that many experts say has led Sistani and the Hawza to ally with SCIRI in the intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and Sistani and the Hawza have spoken against a direct role for the clerics in governing post-war Iraq. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war decision-making by issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. In the early 1980s, Islamic Amal was under the SCIRI umbrella but later broke with it. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi, who returned to Iraq from exile in Iran in April 2003, after Saddam Hussein’s regime fell. Islamic Amal, which has a following among Shiite Islamists mainly in Karbala, conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s. However, it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Since returning to Iraq, Mohammad Taqi has argued against violent opposition to the U.S. occupation, saying that such a challenge would plunge Iraq into civil warfare. Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by CRS-9 renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al- Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA was ultimately penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was expanded two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represented the INA in the seven-party grouping that negotiated the formation of the U.S.-backed Governing Council; and Alawi has been named a member of that Council. He is also one of the nine Council members that will rotate its presidency. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. 5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-10 Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriation, P.L. 108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition- controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December CRS-11 16-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM). Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Monarchists/Sharif Ali. The MCM is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs (cousin of King Faysal II, the last Iraqi monarch) that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. Sharif Ali claims to be the leading heir to the former Hashemite monarchy, although there are other claimants, mostly based in Jordan. The MCM was considered a small movement that could not contribute much to the pre-war overthrow effort. In the post-war period, Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10, 2003, to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven-party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and neither Sharif Ali nor any of his followers was appointed to the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses providing civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the CRS-12 opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would fare better than previous attempts. The Clinton Administration maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist 6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. CRS-13 regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reached Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.7 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as DeputySecretaryof Defense, a leading advocate of overthrowing Iraq’s regime, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the 7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. CRS-14 ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its purported refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people and promoting stability in the Middle East, possibly facilitating a resolution to the Arab- Israeli dispute. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in the runup to the war that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al- Zarqawi (see above) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). The Bush Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting official skepticism of those reports. Some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. 10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. 11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-15 Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little evidence of in-country weapons of mass destruction have thus far CRS-16 been found, although the Administration asserts that such weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition. Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the Iraqi National Congress (INC), funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings immediately following the 1991 Gulf war. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military. CRS-17 ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was formally established on August 1, 2002, and was headed by Wafiq al-Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the government of Bahrain in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the 25-seat Governing Council.) Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the ex-military led groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq. On December 9, 2002, as the decision whether to launch military action approached, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.” That same day, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed above 12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-18 (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six additional groups designated on December 9, 2002, as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003, in northern Iraq. Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six-person committee included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. All six groups of the above groups or personalities are now on the U.S.-backed Governing Council named July 13, 2003. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President Bush’s September 12, 2002, speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups. 13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 14 Williams, Daniel. “U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles.” Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-19 The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of U.N. diplomacyover whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil should authorize war against Iraq for failing to complywith Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection bodyUNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. (For more detail on the final round of inspections and evidence of WMD programs found in the post-war period, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117: Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. The inspectors reported few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Iraqi military, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi militarycommanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of some of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, is unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. CRS-20 Post-War Governance Issues Since Saddam Hussein’s regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and the top U.S. military commander in the Persian Gulf theater, General John Abizaid, says that U.S. forces now face a “classic guerrilla war.” Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well- organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under- represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government. Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration says that it will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May 2003, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self- rule authority. The anti-Saddam groups, led by the seven most active exile opposition parties, asserted that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al- Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party. The “seven-party grouping” strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The grouping CRS-21 subsequently began meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation authorities to try to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven-party grouping. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25-30 member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said it would nominate ministryheads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.15 The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) but reflecting the influence of the seven-party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al- Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, who is president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who 15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-22 heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with, although it is reasonable to believe that he might have an affinity for fellow residents of northern Iraq, the Kurds. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. In late July 2003, the Council decided that nine Council members will rotate as chairpersons, each for one month. Ibrahim al-Jafari of the Da’wa Party is the first chairman. The other eight who will rotate that post are Chalabi, Alawi of the INA, Hakim of SCIRI, Pachachi, Barzani of the KDP, Talabani of the PUK, Bahr al-Ulum, and Abdul Hamid, the Sunni Islamist figure. Among its first actions, the Council has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It also has empowered a three member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition. The grouping, Chalabi, Pachachi, and Akila Hashimi, traveled to the United Nations in July 2003 and received a supportive statement from Secretary General Kofi Annan. No decision on seating the Governing Council at the United Nations was announced. The Governing Council is expected to work with the Coalition Provisional Authority to appoint a constitutional drafting commission. On July 17, 2003, CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to have national elections by summer of 2004. He has linked the potential length of the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration of security in Iraq. As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.16 However, the State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.17 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally- displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity- building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. 16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 17 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-23 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about 160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Of those, 148,000 are U.S. personnel and 12,000 are British. There were 2,000 Australian troops as part of the war fighting coalition, but many of those are now on their way home. Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable, and some U.S. commanders do not rule out an increase in U.S. force levels if necessary. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks. U.S. military operations are focused on hunting down guerrilla resistance leaders and their suspected Baathist financiers, as well as finding former leader Saddam Hussein. The new Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July 17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed 54 U.S. militarypersonnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers — possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda — who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally stronger than elsewhere. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule. Others appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. U.S. military officials put the resistance numbers at about 5,000, although they do not explain precisely how they arrive at that figure. In late June, some opponents of the occupation began identifying themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera, UAE-based Al Arabiya TV, and other outlets. They are using such names as: ! Al Awda (the Return); ! the Snakes; ! the Movement of the Victorious Sect; ! Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq; ! the Salafist Jihad Group (Salafi is a Sunni extremist Islamic movement): and ! Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. CRS-24 The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters have assassinated Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States. In addition, U.S. officials say that the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations are about $3.9 billion per month, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, CPA said on July 18 that acts of sabotage against pipelines and other infrastructure appears to have declined over the past six weeks. The Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA). The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible for a “central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore were responsible for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA), which subsumed ORHA, and Bodine and then Garner departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. U.S. officials, including President Bush, have expressed confidence in Ambassador Bremer, although a Washington Post article on July 26, 2003, said the Administration was considering appointing a well known former official such as former Secretary of State James Baker to help the CPA by coordinating international assistance to Iraq. U.S. officials later said such a move is not now under consideration. Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq, the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of CRS-25 65,000 policemen nationwide.18 The CPA is also recruiting a 7,000 man, all- Iraqi civil defense force to guard installations. Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein. A 1,500 person “Iraq Survey Group,” headed bya U.S. militarycommander but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged weapons of mass destruction. The Survey Group, commanded by Major General Keith Dayton, is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. Kay and Dayton briefed Members of Congress on July 30, 2003, saying they were making substantial progress in uncovering the fate of suspected WMD programs. Thus far, the Survey Group has found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some might contain the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. (The fate of the Kuwaiti missing is discussed in CRS Issue Brief IB92117.) Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing security difficulties and continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others to try to enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other countries is proceeding for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq that would presumably spread some of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden now borne mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries are discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force, and several countries have made begun implementing pledges of troops and or police or support personnel. The commitments of several nations, including Germany, France, India, and Turkey appear to be dependent on whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil authorizes such a force, and several nations appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate. Secretary of State Powell said on July 16 that the United States is discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force. The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The United States and Poland reached agreement in late July 2003 for the United States to fund the deployment of the Polish force, support valued at about $250 million. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,200, of which 2,300 will be Polish. The pledged forces listed below have begun deploying to Iraq as of early August 2003, and U.S. officials say there are now 13,400 non-U.S. troops on the ground, as of July 31, 2003. Confirmed pledges include those shown in Table 1. 18 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-26 Table 1. Multinational Division Force Pledges Azerbaijan 150 Bulgaria 500 Czech Republic 400 Denmark 380 Dominican Republic 300 El Salvador 300 Estonia 55 Georgia 100 Honduras 300 Hungary 300 Italy 3,000 (mostly military police) Japan 1,000 (logistics and combat support) Latvia 150 Lithuania 85 Macedonia 28 Mongolia 200 Netherlands 1,100 Nicaragua 300 Norway 150 Philippines 500 Poland 2,300 Portugal 120 Romania 150 Slovakia 85 South Korea 700 (mostly medical) Spain 1,300 Ukraine 1650 Total Non-U.S./U.K 16,600 CRS-27 The United States has discussed with NATO whether it would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. However, on July 17, NATO secretary general George Robertson said the body had no plans for a greater role beyond providing logistical help to the Polish-led force in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment, by a vote of 97-0, to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. Other countries have also agreed to provide funding for reconstruction. According to the June 30, 2004, report to Congress by the Administration, the following countries have made financial pledges for Iraq reconstruction: United Kingdom ($177.1 million); Japan ($101.8 million); Australia ($60.5 million); UAE ($47.6 million); Canada ($41.2 million); Saudi Arabia ($36.6 million); Spain ($32.2 million); Kuwait ($27.5 million); the European Commission ($26.3 million); and Italy ($22.4 million). U.N. Role. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provides for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27, 2003) appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted above, some countries are conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to Iraq on a formal U.N. authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be weighing. On the other hand, the Washington Post reported on August 2, 2003, that the Administration does not want to agree to a U.N. resolution that dilutes its prerogatives in Iraq, particularly its authority in determining a new political structure. The World Bank, which visited Iraq in late July 2003, said it would resume lending to Iraq after it conducts national elections. Reviving the Oil Industry.19 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. Ambassador Bremer said in a press interview on July 31, 2003, that it could take $50 - $100 billion to reconstruct Iraq, and a $1.6 billion plan to rehabilitate Iraq’s oil industry was agreed in late July. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition 19 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-28 forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. In late July, Iraq contracted to sell oil, about 750,000 barrels per day, slightly below the target rate. Its pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees hope to reach by late 2003. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq assumes that oil exports will yield about $3.6 billion through the end of 2003, and provide about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. The deficit will be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below). A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured CRS-29 Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay (killed after discovery by and a firefight with U.S. forces in Mosul on July 22, 2003); Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra, although that is now in question); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of mid-July 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority officials, more than half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are confirmed killed. Among the others apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al- Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the United States has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, CRS-30 said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). CRS-31 The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. Some Members of both parties have also expressed concern about the costs of the U.S. occupation, and several Members have called on the Administration to take greater steps to persuade other countries to share the burden of peacekeeping in and reconstruction of Iraq. CRS-32 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 18 July 2003 — RL31339_2003-07-18.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated July 18, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President told the U.N. General Assembly that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily, making clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After a November 2002 - March 2003 round of U.N. inspections in which Iraq’s cooperation was mixed, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9, 2003. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led militaryaction would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime, and enhancement of the prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The leadership and precise shape of the permanent government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party is yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and exiled opposition groups form the core of a U.S.-appointed 25-seat “governing council” that was unveiled on July 13, 2003. It is hoped by the Administration that the formation of the council will signal that Iraq is moving toward self rule and calm some of the resistance against U.S. occupation forces in Iraq; the resistance has killed 33 U.S. soldiers since President Bush declared major combat operations ended on May 1, 2003. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 11 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 The Governing Council . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Building Security Institutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Searching for Regime Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has sought to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 17, 2003, and achieved the objective of regime change by April 9, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. The INC’s first Executive Committee consisted of KDP leader Masud Barzani, ex-Baath Party and military official Hassan Naqib, and moderate Shiite cleric Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum. Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to run the INC on a day-to-day basis was Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe the U.S. presence is needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Since establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi has tried to build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi have largely disbanded following the U.S. decisions in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias and to temporarily delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book “Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracyfor Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. Chalabi is part of a grouping of seven major party leaders that have been meeting since the period prior to the war. As discussed below, the seven party leadership council has hoped to become the core of a successor regime, and the seven parties are represented on the 25 seat Governing Council unveiled on July 13, 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy CRS-4 since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more well-educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both the KDP and the PUK are part of the seven party grouping that has now been incorporated into the official 25-seat U.S.-backed Governing Council unveiled on July 13, 2003. Ansar al-Islam/Al Qaeda. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000 people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the millennium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al- Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, 3 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” New York Times, December 6, 2002. 4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, (continued...) CRS-5 although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. Shiite Islamist factions hold at least five seats on the Governing Council unveiled July 13, 2003. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve 4 (...continued) March 18, 2002. CRS-6 of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. A variety of press reports say that individual militias now providing security in many towns in southern Iraq are linked to the Badr Corps. One such militia is derived from the fighters who challenged Saddam Hussein’s forces in the marsh areas of southern Iraq, around the town of Amara, north of Basra. It goes by the name Hizbollah (Party of God)-Amara, and it is headed by marsh guerrilla leader Abdul Karim Muhammadawi, nicknamed “Prince of the Marshes” who was named to the Governing Council on July 13, 2003. He is widely perceived as an ally of SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, D.C., SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority, while at the same time opposing the use of violence against the occupation. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Suggesting that SCIRI sees its interests in a degree of cooperation with the occupation, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has since helped constitute the seven party grouping that now constitutes a part of the 25-seat Governing Council. Abd al-Aziz is on the Council. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Da’wa was part of the seven-party council grouping that is now been incorporated into the Governing Council. Da’wa’s spokesman, Ibrahim Jafari, and its leader in Basra, Abdal Zahra Othman, are on the Governing Council, as is a former Da’wa activist turned human rights activist, Muwaffaq Al-Ruba’i. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. CRS-7 Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, Moqtada is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. The Sadr grouping was not part of the seven party grouping that has been incorporated into the U.S.-backed Governing Council. Neither Moqtada nor any other known Sadr faction members are on the Governing Council. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al- Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza would not seek a direct role in the post-war regime. However, in early July 2003, Sistani began to take a more active role in Iraq’s post-war politics by issuing a statement that only elected Iraqis — not a U.S.-appointed governing council — should draft a constitution. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the CRS-8 1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al- Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. 5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-9 Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represents the INA in the seven party grouping that has become part of the U.S.-backed Governing Council. Alawi is a member of the Governing Council. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriations, P.L. 108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The CRS-10 supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition- controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing, who subsequently became a National Security Council official on counter-terrorism in the first two years of the George W. Bush Administration. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10 to a small but apparently enthusiastic welcome. He did not participate in the seven-party grouping that negotiated with the U.S.-led occupation authority on the formation of the Governing Council, and Sharif Ali was not placed on the Governing Council. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs CRS-11 training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would fare better than previous attempts. The Clinton Administration maintained that that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the degree of threat posed by Iraq. Critics of the Clinton Administration policy on Iraq maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Others suggested the Clinton Administration should focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force if Iraq refused to permit re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons inspectors that left Iraq in December 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6 6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” (continued...) CRS-12 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11, 2001 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technologyreaches Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.7 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported strong 6 (...continued) January 17, 2001. 7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. CRS-13 advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedlyurged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. The Bush 10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-14 Administration did not extensively cite reports that Czech intelligence believed that Iraqi intelligence had met with lead September 11 hijacker Mohammad Atta in Prague in spring 2001, suggesting some official skepticism. However, some outside commentators believed that those reports indicated a direct Iraqi connection to the September 11 attacks. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about Iraq-Al Qaeda connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of State Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam and its enclave leader Abu Musab al-Zarqawi (see above) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of 11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-15 destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings of retaliation and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in October 2002, portions of which were released publicly, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. (No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, and little evidence of actual WMD weapons have thus far been found, although the Administration asserts that such weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.) Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact include the following: CRS-16 ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings immediately following the 1991 Gulf war. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al- Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the government of Bahrain in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s 12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-17 Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. (Kanna is on the 25-seat Governing Council inaugurated July 13, 2003.) Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, virtually none of the groups listed immediately above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq, and the whereabouts of many of their leaders are not known. As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders, and most did not stay in Iraq, according to observers. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq. 13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-18 Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to hold that session. All six groups of the above groups or personalities are now on the U.S.-backed Governing Council named July 13, 2003. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if that country wanted to avert military action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of U.N. diplomacyover whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil should authorize war against Iraq for failing to complywith Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection bodyUNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), Mohammad al-Baradei, most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. The Blix/Baradei briefings said Iraq had not accounted for its past WMD, but the two did not state that they were certain that Iraq had retained WMD, or that they had uncovered any banned WMD. Iraq declared short range ballistic missiles that were determined by Blix to be of prohibited ranges, and Blix ordered Iraq to destroy them. Iraq began the destruction prior to the launching of the U.S.-led war. Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD CRS-19 capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to tryto establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of the top leadership, including Saddam Hussein, is unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the degree of resistance to the U.S.-led occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is stable and democratic. Post-War Governance Issues Since the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, 2003, there has been increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq, and U.S. military officials say that they now face a “classic guerrilla war” against U.S. occupation forces. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well-organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim- dominated government. Establishing Iraqi Self-Rule The Administration asserts that it will stay in Iraq until there is a stable, democratic successor regime that is at peace with its neighbors. However, there has been some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule authority. The anti-Saddam groups, led bythe seven partygrouping discussed below, asserted that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, CRS-20 of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent exiled opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al- Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party. The seven party grouping strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The seven party grouping subsequently began meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation authorities to try to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision. With U.S. casualties in Iraq mounting and a growing sense of resentment among the Iraqi population, the U.S.-led occupation authority (Coalition Provisional Authority, CPA) incorporated the views of the seven party grouping. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003 that the planned 25-30 member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said it would nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.15 The Governing Council. On July 13, 2003, a Governing Council was unveiled to the Iraqi public, appointed by the U.S.-led CPA but reflecting the influence of the seven party grouping, as well as prominent Iraqis who were never in exile and were not affiliated with the exiled opposition. The Council has 25 members, of which 3 are women and 13 are Shiite Muslims. Of the 13 Shiite Muslims on the Council, one seat is held by SCIRI directly (Abd al-Aziz Al Hakim, younger brother of Mohammad Baqr), one is held by a guerrilla affiliated with SCIRI (Abdul Karim al-Muahmmadawi), two are Da’wa Party (Ibrahim al-Jafari and Abdul Zahra Othman) leaders, and considered allies of SCIRI, and one is a former Da’wa activist (Muwaffaq al-Ruba’i). Also on the Council is a moderate Shiite cleric, Mohammad Bahr al-Ulum, but he is considered pro-U.S. and not affiliated with SCIRI or the Da’wa. He headed the Ahl al-Bayt charity center in London since the 1980s. The remaining Shiite Muslims, such as Chalabi and Iyad al-Alawi, are mostly considered secular. Appointed to the Council was one Sunni Muslim Islamist, Muhsin Abdul Hamid, who heads the Iraqi Islamic Party, but he does not have a clear affiliation or relationship with the Shiite Islamists on the Council. 15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-21 The Council includes five Kurds, including the two main Kurdish leaders Jalal Talabani and Masud Barzani. The Kurds are generally considered pro-U.S. and might be expected to vote the way the U.S.-led coalition wants. Although not a cohesive bloc, the Council includes exiles and non-exiles who generally want a liberal democracy and would be considered pro-U.S. Most prominent among them is Chalabi, but this grouping includes National Democratic Party leader Nasir al-Chadirchy and former foreign minister Adnan Pachachi, both of whom are Sunni Muslims, as well as former foreign ministry official Akila al- Hashimi, a Shiite woman. Others most likely to affiliate with this bloc include Sunni businessman Samir Shakir al-Sumaidy; Sunni civil engineer Ghazi al-Yawar, president of Saudi-based Hicap Technology; the Shiite coordinator for the Human Rights Association of Babel, Ahmad al-Barak; and the two other women Council members — Songul Chapouk, a member of the Turkomen minority, who heads the Iraqi Women’s Association, and Raja al-Khuza’i, a Shiite who heads the maternity hospital in Diwaniyah. A member of the Assyrian Christian community is on the Council. Yonadam Kanna, the secretary-general of the Democratic Assyrian Movement, is on the body. It is not known what other members of the Council, if any, he might be aligned with. Also unclear is whether or not Hamid al-Musa, the Shiite head of the Iraqi Communist Party, is allied with anyone else on the Council. The Council has not yet selected a chairperson, but it has taken a few decisions. It has authorized the establishment of an Iraqi war crimes tribunal for Saddam and associates accused of major human rights abuses. It also has empowered a three member delegation to seek formal U.N. recognition. The Governing Council is expected to work with the Coalition Provisional Authority to appoint a constitutional drafting commission. On July 17, CPA head Bremer said that a constitution could conceivably be drafted in time to have national elections by summer of 2004. He has linked the potential length of the U.S. occupation to the completion of successful national elections and the restoration of security in Iraq. As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department supported a group of Iraqi exiles to address issues that would confront a successor government.16 However, the State Department working group (the “Future of Iraq Project”) does not appear to have significant influence on any post- war regime decision-making in Iraq. Some experts believe the Defense Department was promoting a competing or separate group of exiles.17 The State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human 16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. 17 Fineman, Mark, Robin Wright, and Doyle McManus. Preparing for War, Stumbling to Peace. Los Angeles Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-22 services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally- displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity- building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations and the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA) Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, are largely dependent on the amount of continuing Iraqi resistance, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the rate at which such U.S. objectives as the establishment of a stable and democratic successor regime are accomplished. At present, about 160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to Congress mandated byP.L. 108-11. Of those, 148,000 are U.S. personnel and 12,000 are British. There were 2,000 Australian troops as part of the war fighting coalition, but many of those are now on their way home. Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable, and some U.S. commanders do not rule out an increase in U.S. force levels if necessary. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks. The new Centcom commander John Abizaid said on July17, 2003, that the United States faces a “classic guerrilla war” led by “mid-level Baath Party activists organized regionally.” Such attacks have killed 33 U.S. militarypersonnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. The Bush Administration says resistance comes not only from remnants of the Baath Party but also from Arab volunteers — possibly linked to or supportive of Al Qaeda — who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq than elsewhere, where support for Saddam Hussein’s regime was traditionally the strongest. Some elements of the resistance appear to want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to foreign rule. Others appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. In late June, some opponents of the occupation have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera and elsewhere. They have used such names as: — Al Awda (the Return); — The Snakes; — The Movement of the Victorious Sect; — Iraq’s Revolutionaries - Al Anbar’s Armed Brigades; — The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq; and CRS-23 — Armed Islamic Movement for Al Qaeda - Falluja Branch. Actual linkages to Al Qaeda, if any, are not known. The continuing resistance has complicated the U.S. mission. In addition to targeting U.S. forces, resistance fighters are assassinating Iraqis who are cooperating with the United States. In addition, U.S. officials say that the costs of the ongoing U.S. operations are about $3.9 billion per month, about double what was anticipated for the occupation period. On the other hand, CPA said on July 18 that acts of sabotage against pipelines and other infrastructure appears to have declined over the past six weeks. The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who are serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible for a “central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore were responsible for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head the Coalition Provisional Authority, which subsumed ORHA, and Bodine and then Garner departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Building Security Institutions. While attempting to restore securityto Iraq, the CPA is beginning to build new Iraqi institutions that can eventually take over the security function from the United States. The United States is planning to train a 40,000 person Iraqi army, about 10% the size of the pre-war Iraqi force. About 12,000 are expected to be in the force by mid-2004. Former Defense Department official Walter Slocombe is in charge of forming the new Iraqi army. The CPA is also trying to turn basic policing functions over to Iraqis. Overall, about 32,000 Iraqi policemen have returned to their jobs, about half the total goal. The CPA official responsible for the new police force, former New York City police commissioner Bernard Kerik, says it will take about 18 months (end of 2004) to reach the goal of 65,000 policemen nationwide.18 18 Schmitt, Eric. Wolfowitz on Visit to Iraq to Assess Rebuilding Effort. New York Times, July 18, 2003. CRS-24 Searching for Regime Violations. Organs of the CPA and the U.S. government are attempting to uncover abuses and violations of the regime of Saddam Hussein. A 1,500 person “Iraq SurveyGroup,” headed by a U.S. militarycommander but composed of many civilian technical experts, including former U.N. weapons inspector David Kay, is attempting to uncover alleged weapons of mass destruction. The Survey Group is also searching for mass graves of victims of the former regime. Thus far, U.S. military personnel have found at least 60 mass graves, some with hundreds of corpses. Most appear to contain bodies of Kurdish and Shiite opponents of the former regime, but some might contain the bodies of about 600 Kuwaitis missing from the first Gulf war. Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. The relatively slow pace of establishing Iraqi security institutions, coupled with ongoing security difficulties and continued U.S. casualties, has led to calls from Members of Congress and others to try to enlist other countries to help with the stabilization of Iraq. Negotiations with other countries is proceeding for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq that would presumably spread some of the peace-keeping and stabilization burden now borne mostly by U.S. forces. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries are discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force, and several countries have made pledges of troops and or police or support personnel. The commitments of several nations, including Germany, France, and India, appear to be dependent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force, and several nations appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate. Secretary of State Powell said on July 16 that the United States is discussing with other countries the possibility of seeking formal U.N. backing for a multilateral peacekeeping force. The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission in southern Iraq and central Iraq, respectively. The UK-led force is to number about 14,000, of which all but 2,000 are British forces. The Polish-led force is to number about 9,000, of which 2,300 will be Polish. Polish forces have begun deploying to Iraq. Other major pledges include the following: — Spain 1,300 — Italy 3,000 military police and civilian relief workers — the Netherlands 1,100 — Japan 1,000, mostly combat support/logistics — Czech Republic 400 — Ukraine 1,800 — Denmark 380 — Hungary 300 — Bulgaria about 500 — El Salvador 300 (as part of 1,200 person force with Honduras, Nicaragua, and Dominican Republic, each contributing about 300) — Portugal 120 paramilitary police –– Azerbaijan 150 CRS-25 The United States has discussed with NATO whether or not it would take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission. However, on July 17, NATO secretary general George Robertson said the body had no plans for a greater role beyond providing logistical help to the Polish-led force in Iraq. On July 10, 2003, the Senate adopted an amendment to a State Department authorization bill (S. 925) calling on the Administration to formally ask NATO to lead a peacekeeping force for Iraq. A related bill (H.R. 2112) was introduced in the House on May 15, 2003. U.N. Role. Just after the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, the United States and its European allies and other countries reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provides for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently (May 27) appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gave the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. As noted above, some countries are conditioning any contribution of peacekeeping troops to Iraq on a formal U.N. authorization, a step the Administration now appears to be weighing. Reviving the Oil Industry.19 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields after combat began. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban said that Iraq would be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. Its pre- war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees hope to reach by late 2003. However, press reports in mid-July say that Iraq is only exporting about 250,000 barrels per day because attacks on oil infrastructure has slowed its recovery. The CPA-produced budget for Iraq assumes that oil exports will yield about $3.6 billion through the end of 2003, and provide 19 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-26 about half of the approximately $6.6 billion budget for Iraq for the period. The deficit will be covered from funds in the Development Fund for Iraq, set up by the post-war Resolution 1483 (see below). A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of the start of the war, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 lifted sanctions and provided for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. In the year prior to the war, the Administration was gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in CRS-27 Basra, although that is now in question); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid-April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid-April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of mid-July 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority officials, more than half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are confirmed killed. Among the others apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al- Ammash. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. CRS-28 Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there was widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. There was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Criticism of post-war planning has escalated as attacks on U.S. occupation forces have mounted, although the Administration and others say U.S. casualties are relatively light and that the resistance is not jeopardizing overall U.S. objectives for Iraq. Several Committees are conducting inquiries into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. CRS-29 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998-FY2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April 2003) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 27 June 2003 — RL31339_2003-06-27.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated June 27, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President warned that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials made clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. After making a final demand that Iraq fully rid itself of WMD, on March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including liberation of the Iraqi people from an oppressive regime and enhancement of the prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The character of the government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and established opposition groups and emerging local leaders will likely form the core of a new regime. Some of these groups are urging the United States to begin establishing a self-rule authority soon, but the Bush Administration has delayed plans to do so, apparently believing that democratic institutions must be built before power can be handed to an all-Iraqi authority. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 10 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 “Leadership Council” of Seven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority . . . 20 Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 17, 2003, and achieved the objective of regime change by April 9, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since Chalabi returned to Iraq, there have been no large public demonstrations supportive of him or the INC, indicating that he does not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe the U.S. presence is needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Since establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi has tried to build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi have largely disbanded following the U.S. decisions in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias and to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book “Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. Chalabi is part of a grouping of major party leaders, now numbering seven, that have been meeting since prior to the war. As discussed below, the seven-party leadership council hopes to become the core of a successor regime, although the United States has, for now, prevented the grouping from assuming any formal powers inside Iraq. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British CRS-4 influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both the KDP and the PUK are on the seven-party “leadership council.” Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000 people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the millenium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al- Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent; Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom.4 Zarqawi’s current whereabouts are unknown, although some unconfirmed press reports indicate he might have fled to Iran after the fall of the Ansar camp to U.S.-led forces. 3 Chivers, C.J. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” New York Times, December 6, 2002. 4 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-5 Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority. SCIRI initially refused to join a U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam CRS-6 government. However, suggesting that SCIRI does not want to confront the United States, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has since helped constitute the seven-party “leadership council” that is discussing Iraqi self-rule with U.S. occupation authorities. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. On June 27, Muhammad Baqr told his followers that the U.S. occupation of Iraq should be resisted by peaceful means only. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but it lacks its own strong, visible leadership, and many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. Da’wa was given a place on the seven-party “leadership council” in May 2003. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti- regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, he is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd CRS-7 al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al- Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza would not seek a direct or public role in the post-war regime. Some Sistani pronouncements suggest he is increasingly willing to defer to Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim in political decision-making. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. CRS-8 The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition in the mid-1990s caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).5 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al- Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represents the INA on the seven-party “leadership council” that is discussing self rule with the U.S. occupation authorities. However, since the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime, there has been little evident popular support for Alawi. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations 5 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-9 subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriations, P.L. 108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition- controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign CRS-10 against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. welcome. Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10 to a small but apparently enthusiastic He does not have a seat on the seven-party “leadership council.” In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would CRS-11 not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since December 15, 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.6 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks came to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. 6 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. CRS-12 restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.7 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.8 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.9 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.10 7 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 8 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 9 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 10 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-13 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. Some U.S. officials reportedly believed that the United States needed to respond to the September 11 attacks by ending any or all regimes that support terrorist groups, including Iraq. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam (see above) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.11 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. 11 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-14 WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. (No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Administration asserts that such weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.) Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were CRS-15 held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings immediately following the 1991 Gulf war. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al- Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel CRS-16 restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the government of Bahrain in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, none of the groups listed immediately above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq, and the whereabouts of many of their leaders are not known. As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base 12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. 13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. CRS-17 (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that doing so was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq. Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to hold that session. With the exception of Pachachi, these groups and figures are the core five figures in the current seven-party “leadership council” that is pushing U.S. authorities to speed the transition to Iraqi self-rule. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing 14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-18 to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of many of them, as well as the fate of Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the future degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S. and British occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is democratic. Post-War Governance Issues After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, 2003, there is increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well- organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under- represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government. CRS-19 Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. However, there appears to be some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime or that Shiite Islamists would dominate a successor authority, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an Iraqi self-rule authority. The anti-Saddam groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. “Leadership Council” of Seven. In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party. The council of seven strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The leadership council has since been meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation authorities to try to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision. The exact motivations for the delay were not announced, but press reports indicate that U.S. officials believed that a self-rule authority dominated by the seven parties in the leadership council would be unstable and insufficiently committed to democracy. At the same time, there are indications the U.S. occupation authorities (Coalition Provisional Authority) are incorporating the views of the seven parties. U.S. administrator for Iraq Paul Bremer (see below) said on June 23, 2003, that the planned 25-30 member body would have “real authority” from its first days. He said it will nominate ministry heads, recommend policies, and convene a “constitutional conference” to draft a new constitution.15 15 Transcript: Bremer Reviews Progress, Plans for Iraq Reconstruction. Washington File, June 23, 2003. CRS-20 As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address issues that will confront a successor government.16 It is not yet known what influence, if any, these working groups are having on any post-war regime decision- making in Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority. Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, were largely dependent on the amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the speed with which a successor regime is chosen. At present, about 160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable. There are indications that resistance to the U.S. governance of Iraq is growing, judging by the frequency of attacks on U.S. forces over the past few weeks. Such attacks have killed more than 20 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. There is a debate within the Administration over whether the resistance to the U.S. occupation is organized or random. The Administration says resistance is coming from remnants of the Baath Party, from former criminals, and from Arab volunteers who have come to Iraq from other countries to fight the U.S. occupation. Attacks have been more frequent in the Sunni areas of central Iraq than elsewhere, suggesting that Baathist resistance elements are the most active, possibly in combination with foreign Arab fighters. Some elements of the resistance might want to restore the old regime, while others appear to be motivated by opposition to the concept of foreign rule. Others appear to be motivated by the difficulty the U.S. and British authorities have had in restoring civilian services. There are some indications that Shiite Islamists might now be joining the violence against U.S. military personnel. In late June, some opponents of the occupation have identified themselves as distinct groups, scribbling graffiti warnings and faxing statements to the Arab satellite television network Al Jazeera and elsewhere. They have used such names as: ! Al Awda (the Return); ! The Snakes; ! The Movement of the Victorious Sect; and ! The Popular Resistance for the Liberation of Iraq. 16 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. CRS-21 The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible for a “central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head what is called the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA), which subsumes ORHA, and Bodine and then Garner departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. As of late June, organizing proceeds for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq. According to the Administration, more than 30 countries are discussing offers of forces for a multilateral stabilization force. The commitments of several nations appear to be dependent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force, and several nations appear to require U.S. or other funding in order to participate. The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission. Currently about 13,000 non- U.S. troops are in Iraq, mostly British. Some pledges were announced shortly after the “Interim Coalition Stability Operations Conference” of 16 nations, held in London on April 30, 2003, and hosted by the British Minister of Defence, Geoff Hoon. (A follow-up meeting was held in London on May 8.) Other nations are contributing relief supplies and field hospital facilities and services. The United States has urged NATO to take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission, but thus far, NATO has only informally discussed the U.S. proposal. Reportedly, French president Jacques Chirac has said that formal consideration requires an authorizing resolution from the U.N. Security Council. Neither France nor Germany has agreed to participate outside of a NATO framework. U.N. Role. The United States and its European allies and other countries have reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provides for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gives the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize CRS-22 a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. Reviving the Oil Industry.17 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board.. The first exports began in late June 2003, and Ghadhban has said that Iraq will be up to about 1 million barrels per day of exports by mid-July. Its pre-war export rate was about 2.2 million barrels per day, a level that U.S. officials and Iraqi oil appointees hope to reach by late 2003. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. 17 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-23 On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 provides for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. That Development Fund contained about $7 billion in June 2003, consisting of captured Iraqi assets, Iraqi assets abroad, the monies transferred from the oil-for-food account, and U.S. funds available for reconstruction. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al- Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of early June 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority officials, about half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are confirmed killed. Among the apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash . The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). CRS-24 A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. CRS-25 Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Several Committees are discussing the scope of inquiry into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. CRS-26 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998- FY 2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April, 2003 ) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 12 June 2003 — RL31339_2003-06-12.pdf
Order Code RL31339 CRS Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated June 12, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President warned that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials made clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On March 19, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led militaryaction would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The character of the government that will replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and established opposition groups and emerging local leaders will likely form the core of a new regime. Some of these groups are urging the United States to begin establishing a self-rule authoritysoon, but the Bush Administration has delayed plans to do so, apparently believing that democratic institutions must be built before power can be handed to an all-Iraqi authority. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Development of Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups . . . 10 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 “Leadership Council” of Seven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority . . . 19 Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks. Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 17, 2003, and achieved the objective of regime change by April 9, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Manyobservers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 Emergence of An Anti-Saddam Coalition Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias, the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK), participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. SecurityCouncil resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Since returning to Iraq, Chalabi has not mobilized large demonstrations supportive of him or the INC. This would indicate that he does not have a large following inside Iraq. However, anecdotal press reporting suggest that he has attracted some support from those Iraqis that most welcome the U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime and who believe the U.S. presence is needed to ensure security and facilitate reconstruction. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Since establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi has tried to build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. However, the Free Iraqi Forces accompanying Chalabi have largely disbanded following the U.S. decisions in mid-May 2003 to disarm independent militias and to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book “Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracyfor Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammed al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. The Kurds, probably the most pro-U.S. of all the groups in Iraq, do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors have always been fearful that the Kurds might still seek outright independence. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split CRS-4 off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. Both the KDP and the PUK are on the seven-party “leadership council.” Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base was captured, about 8,000 people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600 fighters.3 Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the millenium celebration, the assassination in Jordan of U.S. diplomat Lawrence Foley (2002), and to reported attempts in 2002 to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al- Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent. Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- 3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Al Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammed Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that Mohammed Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He returned to Iraq on May 10, welcomed by large crowds in Basra and Najaf, where he is now based. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammed Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammed Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard, which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials, has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders have criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq and have called for the rapid establishment of an Iraqi self-rule authority. SCIRI initially refused to join a U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam government. However, suggesting that SCIRI does not want to confront the United States, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. He has since joined a grouping of seven on a “leadership council” that is discussing Iraqi self-rule with U.S. occupation authorities. Even though Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim says he is for a democracy and would not seek to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and have been seeking to disarm its fighters. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. CRS-6 Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but it lacks its own strong, visible leadership, and many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. Da’wa was given a place on the seven-party “leadership council” in May 2003. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti- regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammed Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammed Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammed Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, he is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authorityfor his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. An alternate interpretation by some experts is that Haeri is acting at the direction of Iran’s leadership to keep Moqtada Sadr under a measure of control. Moqtada’s reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al- Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former CRS-7 regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza would not seek a direct or public role in the post-war regime. Some Sistani pronouncements suggest he might be willing to defer to Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim in political decision-making. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammed Taqi Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). Development of Schisms Among Anti-Saddam Groups The differences among the various anti-Saddam organizations led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).4 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of 4 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-8 the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iyad Alawi represents the INA on the seven-party “leadership council” that is discussing self rule with the U.S. occupation authorities. Attempting to Rebound from 1996 Setbacks For the two years following the anti-Saddam opposition groups’ 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with these groups. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with an FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the CRS-9 documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998: the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. (An FY2003 supplemental appropriations, P.L. 108-11, added $86.5 million to the allowed draw-down ceiling to enable additional funds to flow to groups helping the United States in Operation Iraqi Freedom. The supplemental brought the total authorized under the Act to $183 million.) The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition- controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The CRS-10 IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. Sharif Ali returned to Iraq on June 10 to a small welcome. He does not have a seat on the seven-party “leadership council.” In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficientlyorganized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Doubts About the Capabilities of the Anti-Saddam Groups During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since December 15, 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million CRS-11 was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.5 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policytoward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technologyreaches Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.6 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barelyraised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.7 After about a year of 5 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. Program. 6 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food 7 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, (continued...) CRS-12 negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.8 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.9 Post-September 11, 2001: Moving to Change the Regime Bush Administration policytoward Iraq became notablymore assertive after the September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 reportedly to consult regional countries about the possibility of 7 (...continued) March 2, 2001. 8 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 9 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-13 confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.10 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials played down this theory.11 Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam Hussein than an ally. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 10 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. 11 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-14 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. (No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Administration asserts that such weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.) Broadening the Internal Opposition to Saddam As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Bush Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those CRS-15 activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings immediately following the 1991 Gulf war. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al- Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. 12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-16 ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the government of Bahrain in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. Second ILA Designations. The Bush Administration applauded efforts during 2001 and 2002 by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, none of the groups listed immediately above has openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq, and the whereabouts of many of their leaders are not known. As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated byme under the Act before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was 13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-17 organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers were determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq. Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammed Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to hold that session. With the exception of Pachachi, these groups and figures are the core of the current seven-party “leadership council” negotiating with U.S. authorities on Iraqi self-rule. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of U.N. diplomacyover whether the U.N. SecurityCouncil should authorize war against Iraq for failing to complywith Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection bodyUNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could CRS-18 have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to tryto establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of many of them, as well as the fate of Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The outcome of a post-war debate on the results of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the future degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S. and British occupation; the amount of WMD ultimately found, if any; and whether a new government is democratic. Post-War Governance Issues After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, 2003, there is increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. U.S. occupation forces are facing increasing guerrilla attacks from remnants of the Iraqi regime or others opposed to the U.S. presence; such attacks have killed more than 30 U.S. military personnel since President Bush declared an end to “major combat operations” in Iraq on May 1, 2003. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well-organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim- dominated government. Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. However, there appears to be some debate between U.S. authorities and key anti-Saddam groups over how and when to establish a successor regime. Senior U.S. officials, including deputy Defense Secretary Paul Wolfowitz, had said in early April 2003 that they hoped to have a successor regime in place within six months of the fall of the regime. However, in mid-May, U.S. officials, apparently fearing that existing major groups could not form a stable regime, backed away from any deadlines for establishing an CRS-19 Iraqi self-rule authority. The anti-Saddam groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. Shortly after the war, the United States began a process of establishing a successor regime. The Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. At that time, U.S. officials said that U.S. plans were for the interim administration to serve for about two years, after which a constitution would be adopted and national elections held. “Leadership Council” of Seven. In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present: SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. At a subsequent meeting on May 9, 2003, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks the little known Nasir al-Chadirchy, head of a party called the National Democratic Party of Iraq, as well as the Da’wa Party. The council of seven strongly criticized the U.S. decision in mid-May 2003 to delay the formation of an Iraqi self-rule authority indefinitely and to instead establish a purely advisory body of 25 to 30 Iraqis. The leadership council has since been meeting among itself and with U.S. occupation authorities to try to obtain at least a partial reversal of that decision. The exact motivations for the delay were not announced, but press reports indicate that U.S. officials believed that a self-rule authority dominated by the seven parties in the leadership council would be unstable and insufficiently committed to democracy. As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address issues that will confront a successor government.15 It is not yet known what influence, if any, these working groups are having on any post-war regime decision- making in Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq/Coalition Provisional Authority. Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, were 15 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. CRS-20 largely dependent on the amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the speed with which a successor regime is chosen. At present, about 160,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq, according to a June 2003 report to Congress mandated by P.L. 108-11. Earlier press reports said the Administration wanted to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, but continued unrest and insecurity in Iraq appears to have made that goal untenable. The United States is discussing with about 40 other countries pledges and mechanisms for a peacekeeping role that might share the burden of post-war security in Iraq, according to the above mentioned report. The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He headed the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance (ORHA), within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine was responsible for a “central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively. Press reports said that senior U.S. officials were dissatisfied with the slow pace of reconstruction under Garner, and on May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. He arrived on May 12 to head what is called the Coalition Provisional Authority (CPA), which subsumes ORHA, and Bodine and then Garner departed shortly thereafter. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort. U.S. officials now refer to the CPA as an occupying authority legitimized by U.N. Security Council Resolution 1483 of May 22, 2003. Among other provisions, the resolution lifted U.N. sanctions on Iraq. Recruiting Other Peacekeepers. As of earlyMay, organizing proceeds for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq. According to the above-mentioned report, more than 40 countries have offered, or are discussing offers of, forces for a multilateral stabilization force. The commitments of several nations appear to be dependent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force. The United Kingdom and Poland have offered to lead multinational divisions in that mission. Currently about 13,000 non-U.S. troops are in Iraq, mostly British. Some pledges were announced shortlyafter the “Interim Coalition StabilityOperations Conference” of 16 nations, held in London on April 30, 2003, and hosted by the British Minister of Defence, Geoff Hoon. (A follow-up meeting was held in London on May 8.) Other nations are contributing relief supplies and field hospital facilities and services. The United States has urged NATO to take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission, but thus far, NATO has only informally discussed the U.S. proposal. Reportedly, French president Jacques Chirac has said that formal consideration requires an authorizing resolution from the U.N. Security Council. Neither France nor Germany has agreed to participate outside of a NATO framework. CRS-21 U.N. Role. The United States and its European allies and other countries have reached a measure of agreement on a U.N. role in post-war Iraq. Resolution 1483, which was adopted unanimously, provides for a U.N. special representative to coordinate the activities of U.N. personnel in Iraq and to help establish a successor government. The Secretary General subsequently appointed Brazilian diplomat Sergio Vieira de Mello for that post. The resolution also gives the United Nations a monitoring role over the Development Fund for Iraq, a fund that will handle Iraq’s oil revenues until there is a successor government. The resolution did not authorize a return to Iraq of U.N. weapons inspectors, although the resolution provides for deliberations on that issue. Some International Atomic Energy Agency inspectors returned to Iraq in June 2003 on a limited nuclear mission in Baghdad. Reviving the Oil Industry.16 As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all were put out quickly. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board.. Some oil production resumed in late April, and Iraqi oil personnel say that the first post-war oil exports will be shipped in mid June. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) 16 For information on the prospects for Iraq’s post-war economy, see CRS Report RL31944. Iraq’s Economy: Past, Present, Future. CRS-22 On March 28, 2003, the U.N. SecurityCouncil unanimouslyadopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the delivery of already contracted supplies. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the six-month phase of the program expired on June 3, 2003. On April 17, 2003, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, signaling that the Administration wanted to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. Resolution 1483 provides for the phasing out of the oil for food program within six months after adoption of that resolution on May 22. The resolution also provided for the United Nations to transfer to the new Development Fund for Iraq $1 billion in funds held by the oil-for-food program escrow fund. (For more information, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, International Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al- Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputyPrime Minister and foremost regime spokesman (surrendered in May 2003); and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country (apprehended in May 2003). Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. As of early June 2003, according to Coalition Provisional Authority officials, about half of the Iraqis on the list of 55 are now in custody or are confirmed killed. Among the apprehended are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash . The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for CRS-23 FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, CRS-24 Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. Prior to the war, it held several hearings on the progress of post-war reconstruction. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Several Committees are discussing the scope of inquiry into why substantial amounts of WMD have not been found in Iraq to date. CRS-25 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998- FY 2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April, 2003 ) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 9 May 2003 — RL31339_2003-05-09.pdf
Order Code RL31339 Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated May 9, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. In September 2002, the President warned that unless Iraq fully disarmed in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials made clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On March 17, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998, and U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. financial backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, several of which are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The character of the government that would replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and the Bush Administration is expecting established opposition groups and emerging local leaders to form the core of a new regime. Some of the pre-existing disputes and schisms among the various anti-Hussein groups are already beginning to break out into a post-war power struggle, and there is a debate among Iraqi groups over how great a role the United States should play in the process of choosing a successor government. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 An Opposition Coalition Emerges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Sadr Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 The Fragmentation of the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Continued Debate Over Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Policy Post-September 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Broadening the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Recruiting Other Peacekeepers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 U.N. Role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Reviving the Oil Industry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks, well before the launch of Operation Iraqi Freedom on March 17, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions. The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose. The Administration apparently believed — and this view apparently still is shared by many experts and U.S. officials — that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. CRS-2 An Opposition Coalition Emerges Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.1 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias — the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK) — participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.2 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian government subsequently re-capitalized the bank with national funds. In 1992, he was convicted in absentia of embezzling $70 million from the bank and sentenced 1 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 2 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 to 22 years in prison. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. In April 2003, senior Jordanian officials, including King Abdullah, called Chalabi “divisive” and stopped just short of saying he would be unacceptable to Jordan as leader of Iraq. Chalabi’s critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Chalabi does not appear to have a large following inside Iraq, although since his return he appears to be attracting support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Some of the Free Iraqi Forces are believed to be Shiite Muslims who may retain loyalties to various Shiite Islamist groups that may be competing with Chalabi for power in post-war Iraq. Since establishing his headquarters in Baghdad, Chalabi has tried to build support by searching for members of the former regime and arranging for U.S. military forces in Iraq to provide security or other benefits to his potential supporters. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book “Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammad al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials did not recognize him as mayor and detained him in April 2003. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq. The Kurds do not have ambitions to play a major role in governing Arab Iraq, but Iraq’s neighbors fear the Kurds might still seek outright independence. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are trained in conventional military tactics. CRS-4 Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the millenium celebration, as well as to recent attempts to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base has been captured, about 8,000 people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600 fighters.3 Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al-Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al- Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent. Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammad Baqr is the 3 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In early May 2003, there were press reports that Mohammad Baqr might resign from his formal SCIRI leadership post and try to establish himself in the Shiite holy city of Najaf, Iraq, as an overarching Shiite authority figure in the image of the late Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. He is to return to Iraq on May 10. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 10,000-15,000 fighters/activists organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammad Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammad Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard — which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials — has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on May 7, 2003, that many Badr activists have infiltrated into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, SCIRI had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Immediately after the fall of the regime on April 9, SCIRI leaders criticized what they called an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq, and they initially refused to join a U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam government. However, suggesting that SCIRI does not want to confront the United States, Abd al-Aziz al Hakim did meet with other opposition leaders in late April 2003 at a post-war governance planning session sponsored by U.S. officials. Nevertheless, U.S. officials are said to be mistrustful of SCIRI and will likely try to prevent any attempt by the movement to establish an Iranian-style Islamic republic. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but it lacks its own strong, visible leadership, and many Da’wa activists appear to be at least loosely allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti- regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. The Kuwaiti branch of the Da’wa Party allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks CRS-6 on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The Hizballah organization in Lebanon was founded by Lebanese clerics loyal to Ayatollah Baqr Al Sadr and the late Ayatollah Khomeini, and there continue to be linkages between Hizballah and the Da’wa Party. The Hizballah activists who held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Some Iraqi Da’wa members look to Lebanon’s senior Shiite cleric Mohammad Hossein Fadlallah, who was a student and protege of Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr, for spiritual guidance. Sadr Grouping. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Although the Al Sadr clan has been closely identified with the Da’wa Party, it appears that members of the clan and their followers currently are operating in post-war Iraq as grouping separate from the Da’wa. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammad Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, were killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. A surviving son, Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 27 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, he is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. To compensate for his lack of religious credentials, he has sought spiritual authority for his actions from exiled Iraqi senior cleric, Ayatollah Kazem Haeri, who is living in Qom, Iran. His reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Abdol Qasem Musavi-Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. Ayatollah Sistani/Hawza al-Ilmiyah. The revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al- Sistani, based in Najaf, is also emerging as a major potential force in post-war Iraq. He is the most senior of the four Shiite clerics that lead the Najaf- based “Hawza al- Ilmiya,” a major grouping of seminaries and Shiite clerics. The Hawza, which is well funded through donations, is becoming an important source of political authority in the Shiite regions of Iraq, hiring Iraqis to perform functions performed by the former regime and issuing directives, often obeyed, for some Iraqi civil servants to return to work. Sistani himself, now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, has a large following of former students throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. During the U.S.-led war against Iraq, Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly tried to intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that many experts say is leading Sistani and the Hawza to ally with the Hakims in the intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs, and it is therefore likely that Sistani and the Hawza would not seek a direct or public role in the post-war regime. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammad Taqi Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the CRS-7 1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). The Fragmentation of the Opposition The differences among the opposition led to the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC group, Iraq National Accord (INA).4 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. He is a secular Shiite Muslim, but most of the members of the INA are Sunni Muslims. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. 4 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-8 Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with a FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998 — the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing. CRS-9 President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, U.N. Requirements, and U.S. Policy.) The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, a career diplomat, Frank Ricciardone, was named as a State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq” — the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or into the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. CRS-10 Continued Debate Over Policy During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since December 15, 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000, the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.5 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist attacks, even though no significant evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. 5 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. CRS-11 Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan: a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.6 The Administration believed that the proposal, by easing the suffering of the Iraqi people, would cause Iraq’s neighbors and other countries to cease unilateral violations of the sanctions regime. Powell, who had openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001, testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.7 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan — new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq — was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.8 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration initially declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of 6 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 7 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 8 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. CRS-12 humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continued to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.9 Policy Post-September 11 Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after the September 11, 2001 attacks, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab-Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its alleged refusal to end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of liberating the Iraqi people. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.10 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Al Qaeda founder Osama Bin Laden was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). 9 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. 10 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. CRS-13 On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials played down this theory.11 Others noted that bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam than a friend. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, bin Laden statement referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement exhorted Iraq to resist impending U.S. military action. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections resumed November 27, 2002 indicated they believed Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of this view cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking 11 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-14 at U.S. interests. (No WMD was used against Iraq during Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the Administration asserts that such weapons will eventually be found in Iraq by the U.S.-led coalition.) Broadening the Opposition. As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action against Iraq, the Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups — the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM — to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed below (except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive draw downs under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim Mukhlis, who claimed support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings immediately following the 1991 Gulf war. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group worked closely with CRS-15 the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al- Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he went to Kuwait, possibly to play a part in a post-Saddam regime there,12 although his current whereabouts are unknown. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the government of Bahrain in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. The Bush Administration applauded efforts over the past year by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the regime vacated Baghdad on April 9, 2003, none of the groups listed above has openly sought a major role in post- Saddam Iraq, and the whereabouts of many of their leaders are not known. 12 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-16 Second ILA Designations. As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.13 An initial group of 3,000 was selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.14 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers are determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq. Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to hold that session. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the 13 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 14 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-17 Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. They noted that Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones. Those who agreed with this view maintained that, as long as Iraq allowed access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others experts believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and was attempting to preserve WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19, 2003. In the war, Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and the whereabouts of many of them, as well as the fate of Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The intensity of any post-war debate on the outcome of the war might depend on such factors as the pace of reconstruction; the degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S. and British occupation; the amount of WMD found, if any, and whether a new government is democratic. CRS-18 Post-War Governance Issues After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, there is increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Some believe that U.S. occupation forces might face increasing guerrilla attacks from remnants of the Iraqi regime or others opposed to the U.S. presence; others say U.S. forces might become caught in the crossfire among ethnic and political factions that might fight each other for power in post-war Iraq. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government. Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. In press interviews on April 6, 2003, Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz indicated that the Administration is hoping to turn post-war governance over to an Iraqi interim administration within six months. The Iraqi opposition to Saddam Hussein, even those groups that have most closely associated with the United States, generally opposes a long-term role for U.S. officials in running a post-war Iraqi government. The opposition groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. The Iraqi National Congress, in particular, has complained that the Administration is handing too much power to former Baathists, who are skilled organizers but who might harbor ambitions of reconstituting Saddam Hussein’s regime. To begin the process of establishing a successor regime, the Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting of about 250 delegates was held in Baghdad on April 26, which ended in agreement to hold a broader meeting, within a month, to name an interim Iraqi administration. Existing U.S. plans are for the interim administration to serve for about two years, after which a constitution would be adopted and national elections held. In parallel with the late April meeting in Baghdad, the five most prominent opposition groups met, with U.S. envoys present. The five groups that met are SCIRI, the INC, the INA, the PUK, and the KDP. This grouping could, according to many experts, become the core of an interim leadership council. At another meeting on May 9, the five agreed to expand their grouping to seven, adding to their ranks a little known Nasir al-Chadirchy of a party called the National Democratic CRS-19 Party of Iraq, and the Da’wa Party. These meetings indicate that, despite their statements opposing the U.S. occupation, some Shiite Islamists are, for now, cooperating with the U.S.-led process for selecting a new government, perhaps to send a signal that they do not necessarily want confrontation with the United States. At the same time, U.S. officials have warned that they will not permit the establishment of a Shiite Islamist theocracy modeled after that of Iran, although some doubt the amount of leverage the United States might have to prevent that outcome. As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address issues that confront a successor government.15 It is not yet known what influence, if any, these working groups are having on any post-war regime decision-making in Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. Post-War U.S. Operations in Iraq. Experts note that projections about U.S. operations in post-war Iraq, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, were largely dependent on the amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the speed with which a successor regime is chosen. At present, about 135,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq. Press reports say the Administration wants to draw the U.S. force level down to about 35,000 by the end of 2003, and the United States is discussing with other countries pledges and mechanisms for a peacekeeping role that might share the burden of post-war security in Iraq (see below). The Bush Administration initially tasked Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) to direct civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He heads the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance, within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine is responsible for a “central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively. During the occupation period, the United States goals are to eliminate remaining WMD and terrorist cells in Iraq, begin economic reconstruction, and purge Baath Party leaders. On May 6, 2003, the Administration appointed former ambassador L. Paul Bremer to lead the overall reconstruction effort, with a focus on political reconstruction. The appointment represented an apparent adjustment from the original structure of the U.S. reconstruction effort, 15 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. CRS-20 although the Administration stated that it was always envisioned that a civilian would eventually take over the U.S. effort. Recruiting Other Peacekeepers.16 As of early May, organizing proceeds for a multinational peacekeeping force in Iraq, which has yet to be named. According to several news reports, the United States, the United Kingdom, and Poland will each head up a peacekeeping presence in one of three Iraqi sectors. (Some reports indicate that a fourth sector may be created.) Under current plans, the U.S. force is to be headquartered in Baghdad, the U.K. force in Basra, and the Polish force in a yet to be determined location. (According to one news report, the United States has agreed to seek international donations to cover the estimated $90 million cost to Poland of deploying 1,500 troops for its headquarters. The United States reportedly will station some 20,000 in its sector. The British defense ministry anticipates that some 35,000 British forces will remain in Iraq through the summer and that some 10,000 British troops will remain as the British commitment for perhaps one to two years.) The force is to deploy at the end of May, according to a report quoting the Polish defense minister, although the commitments of several nations appear to be dependent on whether the U.N. Security Council authorizes such a force. Albania, Bulgaria, Denmark, Italy, the Netherlands, Spain, and the Ukraine have thus far agreed to contribute troops to the force, although few numbers have yet been reported. Spain has agreed to send up to 1,500 troops, although they will be barred from any combat missions. On May 7, Azerbaijan’s parliament approved the deployment of 150 peacekeepers to Iraq. Pledges were announced shortly after the “Interim Coalition Stability Operations Conference” of 16 nations, held in London on April 30, 2003, and hosted by the British Minister of Defence, Geoff Hoon. (A follow-up meeting is to be held in London on May 8.) Other nations — Estonia, Lithuania, Japan, and Romania — have previously expressed interest in contributing, but their names did not appear on the current list. Australia, which had contributed troops for the combat phase of the Iraq war, reportedly will send a detachment of 75 soldiers to protect its Embassy in Baghdad but will not contribute troops to the peacekeeping force, although it may provide some assistance. The Philippines, Qatar, and South Korea reportedly will provide assistance. The United States has urged NATO to take on Iraq as a fifth peacekeeping mission, but thus far, NATO has only informally discussed the U.S. proposal. Reportedly, French president Jacques Chirac has said that formal consideration requires an authorizing resolution from the U.N. Security Council. Neither France nor Germany has agreed to participate outside of a NATO framework. U.N. Role. The United States and its European allies and other countries are discussing, although without yet reaching agreement on, a possible U.N. role in post- war Iraq. The debate over a U.N. role has revived differences that appeared over the decision to go to war against Iraq; some of the countries that opposed the war have objected to aspects of any U.N. resolution that they believe might legitimize a U.S.- British occupation. Prior to the war, most European countries, including U.S. 16 This section provided by Nina Serafino, Specialist in International Affairs. CRS-21 coalition partner Britain, believed that the Iraqi people would more easily adjust to a U.N.- administered post-war Iraq than one administered primarily by the United States and Britain. Senior U.S. officials, with the reported exception of Secretary of State Powell, have wanted to keep the U.N. role limited to humanitarian relief and economic reconstruction, reserving most decisions about a post-war Iraqi power structure to the United States and Britain. However, in an effort to draw support to a draft U.N. resolution that would lift U.N. sanctions, the U.S. draft, as circulated on May 9, would give the United Nations some role in helping establish an Iraqi interim government. In early April, Secretary-General Annan appointed an aide, Pakistani diplomat Rafeuddin Ahmed, to advise him on U.N. operations in Iraq. Reviving the Oil Industry. As the driver of Iraq’s economy, the rebuilding of the oil industry is receiving substantial U.S. attention. It has been widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund much of the costs of reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers had been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields, but coalition forces quickly secured Iraq’s southern oil fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all have now been put out. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. In early May 2003, the U.S.-led coalition set up an advisory board, headed by former Shell executive Phillip Carroll, to oversee the rebuilding of Iraq’s oil sector. An Iraqi oil industry professional, Thamer Ghadhban, was named to serve as head of the interim management team that will run Iraq’s oil ministry and report to the advisory board.. Some oil production is reported to have resumed as of April 23, although not yet enough to allow for export. The legal issues surrounding Iraq’s export of oil — particularly the lack of a duly constituted Iraqi authority that can legally sell oil on the world market — remain unresolved. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarted the program’s operations and empowered the United Nations, for a 45-day period (until May 12), to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is setting priorities for and directing the CRS-22 delivery of already contracted supplies. The Bush Administration had envisioned that a post-war Iraqi interim administration will reassume those functions from U.N. staff when an interim administration is in place and able to perform these duties. The enhanced U.N. authority was extended on April 25, 2003, to last at least until the current six-month phase of the program expires on June 3, 2003. The program must be renewed by U.N. Security Council resolution if it is to be continued. On April 17, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, suggesting the Administration wants to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than extending the oil-for-food program. A draft U.N. Security Council resolution lifting most U.N. sanctions was circulated on May 9. Statements by France, Russia, and China during April indicated these governments might go along with ending U.N. sanctions against Iraq if the United States shows flexibility on allowing a greater U.N. role in post-war Iraq, but it is not clear whether the U.S. draft resolution satisfies that demand. France and Russia said that U.N. weapons inspectors should be allowed back in Iraq to oversee the search for weapons of mass destruction (WMD), and they appeared to link their approval for ending sanctions to U.S. agreement on this issue. The United States has said that it and Britain are performing the WMD search now that the Iraqi regime has fallen and it opposes a return of the inspectors, although some press reports in early May said the United States might allow nuclear inspectors from the International Atomic Energy Agency back into Iraq to resume work. The draft U.N. Security Council resolution circulated May 9, referenced above, does not provide for a return of U.N. weapons inspectors. War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al- Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman; and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country. Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. Among them are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam; Vice President Taha Muhi ad-Din Ma’ruf; and suspected WMD manager Hoda Mahdi Salih al-Ammash . CRS-23 The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members — Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. CRS-24 — wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. It has held some hearings on issues of post-war reconstruction and the effects of a war on the Middle East region as a whole, as well as the likely costs of the fighting and reconstruction. Some Members made floor statements and given speeches and press conferences to state their views on whether force should be used to obtain Iraq’s disarmament. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Some Members have said they believe that the formation of an Islamic state led by Iraq’s Shiite community would be inconsistent with U.S. goals for Iraq. CRS-25 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998- FY 2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April, 2003 ) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 23 April 2003 — RL31339_2003-04-23.pdf
Order Code RL31339 Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Updated April 23, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. Since September 2002, the President has said that unless Iraq fully disarms in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials have made clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On March 17, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm Iraq and change its regime. The regime fell on April 9. In the months prior to the war, the Administration stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq had been declared U.S. policy since November 1998. Even before then, U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, some of which received U.S. political and financial support and military training. Several of the groups backed by the United States are now contending for power in post-Saddam Iraq. Past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The character of the government that would replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party, and the exact process by which that government will be chosen, are yet to be determined. Some Administration officials reportedly had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, no senior Hussein regime figures defected, and the Bush Administration is expecting established opposition groups and emerging local leaders to form the core of a new regime. Some of the pre-existing disputes and schisms among the various anti-Hussein groups are already beginning to break out into a post-war power struggle, and there is a debate among Iraqi groups over how great a role the United States should play in the process of choosing a successor government. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 An Opposition Coalition Emerges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Shiite Islamist Organizations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 SCIRI/Badr Corps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Sadr Clan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Ayatollah Sistani . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Islamic Amal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 The Fragmentation of the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Continued Debate Over Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Policy Post-September 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Broadening the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Assessments of the War . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 U.S.-Led Post-War Operations in Iraq . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Governance The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq since shortly after the September 11, 2001, attacks, well before the launch of Operation Iraqi Freedom on March 17, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions.1 The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. Many Shiites blamed the United States for not supporting their uprising and standing aside as the regime retaliated against those who participated in the rebellion. Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there and subsequently remained largely free of Baghdad’s rule. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose.2 The Administration apparently believed – and this view apparently still is shared by many experts and U.S. officials – that a coup by elements within the 1 Shiites constitute about 65% of Iraq’s population but historically have been repressed and under-represented in governing bodies by the members of the Sunni Muslim sect. Kurds, who are not Arabs, constitute about 20% of the population of about 20 million. 2 Tyler, Patrick. “Plan On Iraq Coup Told to Congress.” New York Times, Feb. 9, 1992. CRS-2 current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. An Opposition Coalition Emerges Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the post-war rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.3 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formally constituted when the two main Kurdish militias — the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK) — participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, major Shiite Islamist groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.4 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim from a prominent banking family. He was educated in the United States as a mathematician. He fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military 3 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 4 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial malfeasance (alleged embezzlement or, according to some reports, facilitating loans to associates), and he left Jordan, possibly with some help from members of Jordan’s royal family, in 1989. The Jordanian government subsequently recapitalized the bank with national funds. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. His critics acknowledge that, despite allegations about his methods, he has been single-minded in his determination to overthrow Saddam Hussein, and he is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that were the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Chalabi does not appear to have a large following inside Iraq, although since his return he appears to be attracting support from those Iraqis that most welcomed the U.S. military offensive against Iraq as liberation from Saddam Hussein’s regime. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters (“Free Iraqi Forces”) were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. Chalabi and some Free Iraqi Forces later deployed to Baghdad and other parts of Iraq. Some of the Free Iraqi Forces are believed to be Shiite Muslims who may retain loyalties to various Shiite Islamist groups that may be competing with Chalabi for power in post-war Iraq. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book “Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. Another INC activist, Mohammad al-Zubaidi, declared himself in charge of Baghdad in mid-April, but U.S. officials say they did not appoint him and do not recognize him as mayor or governor of Baghdad. Some press reports say that he is more a rival of Chalabi than an ally. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq, although some fear the Kurds might still seek outright independence. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. (Iraq became an independent Kingdom in 1932, although it remained under British influence until the 1958 fall of the British-installed monarchy.) In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left-leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000-60,000 fighters, some of which are said to be increasingly well-trained in conventional military tactics. CRS-4 Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), which is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the millenium celebration, as well as to recent attempts to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, during which its base has been captured, about 8,000 people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600 fighters.5 Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. In a presentation to the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al-Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might have viewed Ansar al- Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents. Many experts believed Baghdad-Ansar links were tenuous or even non-existent. Shiite Islamist Organizations Some outside experts have had concerns about the potential strength and ideological orientation of Iraq’s Shiite Islamic fundamentalist groups in post- Saddam Iraq. SCIRI/Badr Corps. The most well known among these is called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI), which was a member of the INC in the early and mid-1990s but progressively distanced itself from the INC banner. SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al- Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq, a vision that, if realized, might conflict with U.S. plans to forge a democratic Iraq. Baqr Hakim and his family fled Iraq to Iran in 1980, during a major crackdown on Shiite activist groups by Saddam Hussein. Saddam feared that Iraqi Shiite Islamists, inspired and emboldened by the Islamic revolution in Iran in 1979, posed a major threat to his regime. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party (see below). Mohammad Baqr is the 5 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. In addition to its agents and activists in the Shiite areas of Iraq, SCIRI has about 5,000 fighters organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that, during the 1980s and 1990s, conducted forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack Baath Party officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammad Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim, who returned to Iraq on April 20, 2003, to pave the way for Mohammad Baqr’s return. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Iran’s Revolutionary Guard — which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials — has been the key patron of the Badr Corps, providing it with weapons, funds, and other assistance. The Badr Corps fought alongside the Guard against Iraqi forces during the Iran-Iraq war. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. Some Badr fighters deployed inside northern Iraq on the eve of Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the New York Times reported on April 23, 2003, that Badr activists are infiltrating into Iraq to build support for SCIRI. Until August 2002 when Abd al- Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, it had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Since the start of Operation Iraqi Freedom, SCIRI leaders have been increasingly critical of what they call an illegitimate U.S. occupation of Iraq, and they have refused to join a U.S.-led process to establish an interim post-Saddam government. Unlike some other Shiite Islamist groups, SCIRI has had good working relations with some Sunni oppositionists and the Kurds. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party, perhaps Iraq’s oldest Shiite Islamist grouping, continues to exist as a separate group, but it appears to be allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in 1957 by a revered Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. That unrest included an attempted assassination of senior Iraqi leader Tariq Aziz. Its main spokesman is Ibrahim al-Jafari. The Da’wa allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. Members of the Hizballah organization in Lebanon that held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. Hizballah’s founders were followers of Ayatollah Khomeini and Da’wa Party leaders such as Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr. Sadr Clan. Members of the clan of the late Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr have become highly active in post-Saddam Iraq. Another revered member of the clan, Mohammad Sadiq Al Sadr, and two of his sons, was killed by Saddam’s security forces in 1999. Another son, Moqtada al-Sadr, who is about 30 years old, has attempted to rally his followers to attain a prominent role in post-Saddam Shiite CRS-6 politics. He and his clan apparently have a large following in the Shiite neighborhoods of Baghdad, which, after the fall of the regime on April 9, renamed their district “Sadr City,” from the former name of “Saddam City.” However, he is viewed by Iran and many Iraqi Shiites as a young radical who lacks religious and political weight. His reputation may have been tarnished in early April when Moqtada al Sadr reportedly killed Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Khoi, shortly after his return to Najaf from exile in London. Abd al-Majid Khoi headed the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi differed with the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran. Ayatollah Sistani. Both the Sadr grouping and SCIRI are reportedly vying for the backing of the revered Grand Ayatollah Ali al-Sistani, based in Najaf. Now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, he has a large following throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. Moqtada al-Sadr and his followers reportedly are trying to intimidate Sistani by surrounding his office in Najaf with armed gunmen, a tactic that many experts say will likely lead Sistani to ally with the Hakims in any intra-Shiite power struggle. Sistani, who is said to be of Iranian ethnicity, is considered to be in the tradition of Ayatollah Khoi in opposing a direct role for clerics in governmental affairs. Islamic Amal. SCIRI has been allied with another Shiite Islamist organization called the Islamic Amal (Action) Organization. It is headed by Mohammad Taqi Modarassi. Islamic Amal conducted attacks against Saddam Hussein’s regime in the 1980s, although it does not appear to have a following nearly as large as SCIRI or the other Shiite Islamist groups. Modarassi’s brother, Abd al-Hadi, headed the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain, which tried to stir up Shiite unrest against the Bahrain regime in the 1980s and 1990s (see below). The Fragmentation of the Opposition The differences among the opposition led the near collapse of the U.S. regime change effort the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units on the front lines facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders point to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the opposition caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a non-INC CRS-7 group, Iraq National Accord (INA).6 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and a physician by training. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and did not announce any key defections from the regime during Operation Iraqi Freedom, nor has it since found or captured any former regime leaders. Although it has was cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with a FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among 6 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-8 other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998 – the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by Ahmad Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, Compliance, and U.S. Policy.) The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, career diplomat Frank Ricciardone was named as the State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” – the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance CRS-9 under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The IMIK and the MCM, in particular, were considered small movements that cannot contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK did not receive U.S. support after 2001, although it was not formally taken off the ILA eligibility list. In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime, or the Free Iraqi Forces that deployed to Iraq toward the end of the active combat phase of the war. Continued Debate Over Policy During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since December 15, 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least: $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million CRS-10 was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000 the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.7 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist attacks, even though no hard evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan – a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.8 The United States asserted that this step would alleviate the suffering of the Iraqi people. Powell, who has sometimes openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001 testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.9 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan – new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq – was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). 7 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. 8 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 9 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. CRS-11 Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.10 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that if there were a real option to overthrow Saddam Hussein, “I would think it was worthwhile,” although he also stated that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continue to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, according to several observers, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.11 Policy Post-September 11 Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after September 11, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab- Israeli dispute and opposed confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its refusal to verifiably end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of 10 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. 11 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-12 conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. The Administration added that regime change would have the further benefit of freeing the Iraqi people of a brutal regime. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Although they did not assert that Saddam Hussein’s regime had a direct connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and February 2003, that there was evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda. Some outside observers expressed skepticism about such connections because of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group) had links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.12 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq, largely isolated after the first Gulf war, was politically close to Sudan. Bin Laden and Al Qaeda was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials played down this theory.13 Others noted that Al Qaeda founder Osama bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he was more an enemy of Saddam than a friend. In the Administration view, the two shared similar anti-U.S. goals, which outweighed ideological differences and propelled them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those ideological differences were evident in a February 12, 2003, statement by bin Laden referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement did express solidarity with Iraq on the eve of U.S. military action. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD — coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD — constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections beginning November 27, 2002 indicated they believe Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on 12 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. 13 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-13 other weapons categories were making progress even without total Iraqi cooperation. ! Iraq used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran), implying that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others noted that Iraq did not use such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields in that war. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of the Administration cited presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002, stating the CIA view that Iraq was likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, according to that argument, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. Broadening the Opposition. As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action to disarm Iraq and change its regime, the Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups – the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM – to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which have tended to favor different opposition groups. In conjunction with the stepped up engagement with the opposition, on August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. The Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed below (all except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to CRS-14 the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive drawdowns under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim Mukhlis, who claims support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi. ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings immediately following the 1991 Gulf war. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group works closely with the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al- Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003, said he is now in Kuwait, possibly preparing, with U.S. help, to play a part in a post-Saddam regime there,14 although his whereabouts are unknown as of late April. ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above). The Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation 14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-15 of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the government of Bahrain in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. The Bush Administration applauded efforts over the past year by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. However, since the fall of the regime on April 9, these groups have not openly sought a major role in post-Saddam Iraq and the whereabouts of many of their leaders are not known. Second ILA Designations. As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was been selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.16 These oppositionists served with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers are determining Iraq’s political structure. 15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 16 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-16 The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq. Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to hold that session. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether or not the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and would continue only to try to divide the Council and avert war, while preserving WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and turned its full attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19. Assessments of the War. A major issue in the military planning debate was over whether Iraq’s military would quickly unravel or rebel against Saddam Hussein in the face of U.S. military action or whether it would fight hard to defend the regime. Some maintained that Iraqi forces would likely defect or surrender in large numbers, as happened in the 1991 Gulf war, when faced with a militarily superior force. Others contrasted the current situation with the 1991 war and argued that Iraqi CRS-17 forces would hold together and fight fiercely because they were defending Iraq itself, not an occupation of Kuwait. Some believed the Iraqi military would quickly retreat into urban areas and hope to inflict large numbers of casualties on American forces. Iraq’s conventional military forces were overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, although the regime, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or Baathist political figures came forward to try to establish a post-Saddam government, but senior regime leaders fled Baghdad, and their whereabouts, as well as the fate of Saddam Hussein, are unknown. The intensity of any post-war debate on the outcome of the war might depend on such factors as humanitarian conditions, the degree of resistance, if any, to a U.S. and British occupation, the amount of WMD found, if any, and whether a new government is democratic. Prior to the war, many officials and experts had thought the Administration would decide not to use military force to change Iraq’s regime or reduce its WMD capabilities. Some Members of Congress, some outside experts, and reportedly many senior military leaders believed Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones and that, as long as Iraq continued to allow access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. Post-War Governance Issues After the fall of Saddam Hussein’s regime on April 9, there is increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over how to establish a post-war interim regime. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, many Iraqis now want U.S. and British forces to leave Iraq. Some believe that U.S. occupation forces might face guerrilla attacks from remnants of the Iraqi regime; others say U.S. forces might become caught in the crossfire among ethnic and political factions that might fight each other for power in post-war Iraq. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who, as noted above, are well organized and are asserting growing control over areas inhabited by Iraq’s Shiites. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government. Establishing an Iraqi Interim Administration. The Administration asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. In press interviews on April 6, 2003, Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz indicated that the Administration is hoping to turn post-war governance over to an Iraqi interim administration within six months. The Iraqi opposition to Saddam Hussein, even those groups that have most closely associated with the United States, generally CRS-18 opposes a major role for U.S. officials in running a post-war Iraqi government. The opposition groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. The Iraqi National Congress, in particular, fears that the Administration might hand too much power to former Baathists. To begin the process of establishing a successor regime, the Administration organized an April 15 meeting, in Nasiriyah, of about 100 Iraqis of varying ideologies, present by U.S. invitation. Many of the attendees were representatives of Iraqi tribal groupings that had not been politically active before. However, SCIRI, along with several Shiite clerics that have appropriated authority throughout much of southern Iraq since the fall of the regime, boycotted the meeting and called for an Islamic state and the withdrawal of U.S. forces. Another meeting is to be held in Baghdad on April 26, but SCIRI has said it will not attend. Some U.S. officials want to bring the Shiite Islamists into the U.S.-led process, but, based on their statements, most Shiite leaders appear to feel they can assert their authority in post-war Iraq apart from the United States, and that participation in the U.S.-led process might discredit them in the eyes of most Iraqis. As part of the planning process that took place before the war, the U.S. State Department and the Defense Department supported groups of Iraqi exiles to address issues that confront a successor government.17 It is not yet known what influence, if any, these working groups will have on any post-war regime decision-making in Iraq. The U.S. State Department project, which cost $5 million, consisted of working groups that discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; (7) economy and infrastructure; (8) education; (9) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration policy; (10) foreign and national security policy; (11) defense institutions and policy; (12) free media; (13) civil society capacity-building; (14) anti-corruption measures; and (15) oil and energy. U.S.-Led Post-War Operations in Iraq. Experts note that all projections, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, could be determined by the amount of Iraqi resistance, if any, the number of U.S. casualties taken, and the speed with which a successor regime is chosen. At present, about 125,000 U.S. and British troops remain in Iraq. The Chief of Staff of the Army, General Eric Shinseki, told the Senate Armed Services Committee on February 24 that as many as 200,000 U.S. troops might be needed for a post-war occupation, although other Administration officials, including Wolfowitz, have disputed the Shinseki assessment. The United States is discussing with other countries pledges and mechanisms for a peacekeeping role that might share the burden of post-war security in Iraq. Some pledges, such as a contribution by Italy for police to work in Iraq’s cities, have been made. Under plans formulated before hostilities began, Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) is directing civilian reconstruction, working through a staff of U.S. diplomats and other 17 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. CRS-19 U.S. government personnel who will serve as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He heads the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance, within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003, executive order. After spending the combat phase of the war in neighboring Kuwait, Garner and some of his staff of about 200 deployed to Baghdad on April 21, 2003, to begin work. Former Ambassador to Yemen Barbara Bodine is responsible for a “central” region; and retired generals Buck Walters and Bruce Moore are responsible for “southern” and “northern” regions, respectively. During the occupation period, the United States goals are to eliminate remaining WMD and terrorist cells in Iraq, begin economic reconstruction, and purge Baath Party leaders. Iraq’s oil industry is to be rebuilt and upgraded. The United States and its European allies are discussing a possible U.N. role in post-war Iraq, which was the focus of President Bush’s meeting in Belfast with British Prime Minister Blair on April 7 and 8. Prior to the war, Britain and most European countries believed that the Iraqi people would more easily accommodate a U.N.- administered post-war Iraq than one administered primarily by the United States and Britain. Senior U.S. officials, with the reported exception of Secretary of State Powell, wanted to keep the U.N. role limited to humanitarian relief and economic reconstruction, reserving most decisions about a post-war Iraqi power structure to the United States and Britain. Thus far, there has been no agreement on the exact nature of the U.N. role in post-war Iraq, and the U.N. does not at this time have a role in the U.S.-led process of establishing a new government. However, U.S. officials say they want a new U.N. Security Council resolution that would endorse a new government when it is established. Secretary-General Annan has appointed a U.N. coordinator, Pakistani diplomat Rafeuddin Ahmed, to run U.N. operations in Iraq. However, the debate over a U.N. role has revived differences that appeared over the decision to go to war against Iraq; some of the countries that opposed the war are reportedly objecting to a resolution that they believe might legitimize a U.S.- British occupation. Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues. It is widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers have been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields. Iraq set Kuwait’s oil fields afire before withdrawing from there in 1991, but coalition forces say they have secured Iraq’s southern oil fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and all have now been put out. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul were not set afire. There is a debate within the Administration over how direct will be the U.S. participation in running Iraq’s oil industry during the occupation period. The outcome of that issue might hinge on the character of U.N. involvement in post-war Iraq. Some oil production is reported to have resumed as of April 23, although not yet enough to satisfy Iraq’s domestic needs, let alone allow for export. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s CRS-20 vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Some press reports suggest the Administration is planning to exert such control,18 although some observers speculate that the Administration had sought to create such an impression in order to persuade Russia to support use of force against Iraq. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis have been receiving all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. (See CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil-for-Food Program, Sanctions, and Illicit Trade.) On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarts the program’s operations and empowers the United Nations, for a 45-day period, to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is to set priorities for and direct the delivery of already contracted supplies. The Bush Administration had envisioned that a post-war Iraqi interim administration might reassume those functions from U.N. staff when an interim administration is in place and able to perform these duties. However, on April 17, the Administration called for a lifting of U.N. sanctions against Iraq, suggesting the Administration wants to focus on restoring normal international commerce with Iraq rather than reviving the oil-for-food program. The program expires on June 3, 2003, and must be renewed by U.N. Security Council resolution if it is to be continued. War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity, if and when they are caught. The Administration said in early April 2003 that Saddam and his inner circle should be tried by Iraqis if they are captured, although others might be tried by a U.S.-led process for any crimes committed in the course of the 2003 war. Over the past year, the Administration had been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those it had sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al- Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi (surrendered in mid April 2003); Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother (captured in mid April 2003); Watban al-Tikriti (captured in April 2003) and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman; and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country. 18 “After Saddam, an Uncertain Future,” Insight Magazine, February 3, 2003. CRS-21 Others not on the list of twelve, but part of a list of 55 former regime officials sought by the United States for questioning and possible arrest, have been captured or surrendered. Among them are Amir al-Saadi, chief science adviser to Saddam; and Jamal Mustafa al-Tikriti, a son-in-law of Saddam. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of the 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals mentioned above. In August 2000, the Clinton Administration’s Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes, David Scheffer, said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These included the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread agreement in Congress that regime change was desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive was the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the CRS-22 opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members – Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. – wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. It has held some hearings on issues of post-war reconstruction and the effects of a war on the Middle East region as a whole, as well as the likely costs of the fighting and reconstruction. Some Members made floor statements and given speeches and press conferences to state their views on whether force should be used to obtain Iraq’s disarmament. During the war and in its aftermath, several Members have applauded the performance of the U.S. military and the overthrow of the regime. Some Members, however, have criticized the Administration for inadequate planning for the post-war period in light of major looting and disorder in Iraq’s cities after the fall of the regime. Some Members have said they believe that the formation of an Islamic state led by Iraq’s Shiite community would be inconsistent with U.S. goals for Iraq. CRS-23 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998- FY 2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 3.1 (announced April, 2003 ) 6.9 (remaining to be allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.
Another version (English): 7 April 2003 — RL31339_2003-04-07.pdf
Order Code RL31339 Report for Congress Received through the CRS Web Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts And Post-War Iraq Updated April 7, 2003 Kenneth Katzman Specialist in Middle Eastern Affairs Foreign Affairs, Defense, and Trade Division Congressional Research Service ̃ The Library of Congress Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Iraq Summary In his 2002 and 2003 State of the Union messages, President Bush characterized Iraq as a grave potential threat to the United States because of its refusal to abandon its weapons of mass destruction (WMD) programs as required by U.N. Security Council resolutions and the potential for it to transfer WMD to terrorist groups. Since September 2002, the President has said that unless Iraq fully disarms in cooperation with United Nations weapons inspectors, the United States would lead a coalition to achieve that disarmament militarily. U.S. officials have made clear that this would include the ouster of Iraq’s President Saddam Hussein’s regime. On March 17, 2003, the United States launched “Operation Iraqi Freedom,” a war effort to disarm Iraq and change its regime. Since February 2003, the Administration has stressed that regime change through U.S.-led military action would yield benefits beyond disarmament, including liberation from an oppressive regime for the Iraqi people and enhancement of the prospects for peace and democracy throughout the Middle East. The goal of regime change in Iraq has been declared U.S. policy since November 1998. Even before then, U.S. efforts to oust Saddam had been pursued, with varying degrees of intensity, since the end of the Gulf war in 1991. These efforts primarily involved U.S. backing for opposition groups inside and outside Iraq, some of which have been receiving U.S. political and financial support and military training. According to several experts, past efforts to change the regime floundered because of limited U.S. commitment, disorganization of the Iraqi opposition, and the efficiency and ruthlessness of Iraq’s several overlapping intelligence and security forces. Previous U.S. administrations ruled out major U.S. military action to change Iraq’s regime, believing such action would be costly, risky, and not necessarily justified by the level of Iraq’s lack of compliance on WMD disarmament. The character of the government that would replace Saddam Hussein’s Baath Party, should Operation Iraqi Freedom succeed, is yet to be determined. Some Administration officials had hoped that major military and governmental defections from the Hussein regime would serve as the core of a successor government. However, the Hussein regime has generally held together throughout Operation Iraqi Freedom, and the Bush Administration is apparently turning to the exiled opposition groups to form the core of a new regime, although Iraqis currently living within the country are likely to be incorporated into a new government eventually. It is possible that some of the pre-existing disputes and schisms within the opposition could break out into a post-war power struggle. This report will be updated as warranted by major developments. Contents Past Attempts to Oust Saddam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 An Opposition Coalition Emerges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ahmad Chalabi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 The Kurds/KDP and PUK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Ansar al-Islam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 SCIRI/Badr Corps/Hakim Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Da’wa Party . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Relations With Other Shiite Islamic Groups and Personalities . . . . . . . 5 The Fragmentation of the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 The Iraqi National Accord (INA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Iraq Liberation Act . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Continued Debate Over Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Bush Administration Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Pre-September 11 Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Policy Post-September 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Iraq and Al Qaeda . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 WMD Threat Perception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Broadening the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Second ILA Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Decision to Take Military Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Assessments of the War . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Post-War Governance Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Iraqi Interim Administration? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 War Crimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Congressional Reactions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Iraq: U.S. Regime Change Efforts and Post-War Iraq The United States has been attempting to change Iraq’s regime since the 1991 Persian Gulf war, although achieving this goal was not declared policy until 1998. In November 1998, amid a crisis with Iraq over U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections, the Clinton Administration stated that the United States would seek to go beyond containment to promoting a change of regime. A regime change policy was endorsed by the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, October 31, 1998). Bush Administration officials have emphasized regime change as the cornerstone of U.S. policy toward Iraq, even before the launch of Operation Iraqi Freedom on March 17, 2003. Past Attempts to Oust Saddam Prior to the launching on January 16, 1991 of Operation Desert Storm, an operation that reversed Iraq’s August 1990 invasion of Kuwait, President George H.W. Bush called on the Iraqi people to overthrow Saddam. Within days of the end of the Gulf war (February 28, 1991), opposition Shiite Muslims in southern Iraq and Kurdish factions in northern Iraq, emboldened by the regime’s defeat and the hope of U.S. support, launched significant rebellions.1 The revolt in southern Iraq reached the suburbs of Baghdad, but the well-trained and loyal Republican Guard forces had survived the war largely intact, having been withdrawn from battle prior to the U.S. ground offensive, and it defeated the Shiite rebels by mid-March 1991. The Kurds, benefitting from a U.S.-led “no fly zone” established in April 1991, were able to drive Iraqi troops out of much of northern Iraq and establish an autonomous zone there; the Kurds remain largely free of Baghdad’s rule today. According to press reports, about two months after the failure of the Shiite uprising, President George H.W. Bush forwarded to Congress an intelligence finding stating that the United States would undertake efforts to promote a military coup against Saddam Hussein; a reported $15 million to $20 million was allocated for that purpose.2 The Administration apparently believed – and this view apparently still is shared by many experts and U.S. officials – that a coup by elements within the current regime could produce a favorable new government without fragmenting Iraq. Many observers, however, including neighboring governments, feared that Shiite and 1 Shiites constitute about 65% of Iraq’s population but historically have been repressed and under-represented in governing bodies by the members of the Sunni Muslim sect. Kurds, who are not Arabs, constitute about 20% of the population of about 20 million. 2 Tyler, Patrick. “Plan On Iraq Coup Told to Congress.” New York Times, Feb. 9, 1992. CRS-2 Kurdish groups, if they ousted Saddam, would divide Iraq into warring ethnic and tribal groups, opening Iraq to influence from neighboring Iran, Turkey, and Syria. An Opposition Coalition Emerges Reports in July 1992 of a serious but unsuccessful coup attempt suggested that the U.S. strategy might ultimately succeed. However, there was disappointment within the George H.W. Bush Administration that the coup had failed and a decision was made to shift the U.S. approach from promotion of a coup to supporting the diverse opposition groups that had led the postwar rebellions. At the same time, the Kurdish, Shiite, and other opposition elements were coalescing into a broad and diverse movement that appeared to be gaining support internationally. This opposition coalition seemed to provide a vehicle for the United States to build a viable overthrow strategy. Congress more than doubled the budget for covert support to the opposition groups to about $40 million for FY1993.3 The Iraqi National Congress/Ahmad Chalabi The growing opposition coalition took concrete shape in an organization called the Iraqi National Congress (INC). The INC was formed when the two main Kurdish militias — the Kurdistan Democratic Party (KDP) and the Patriotic Union of Kurdistan (PUK) — participated in a June 1992 meeting in Vienna of dozens of opposition groups. In October 1992, the major Shiite groups came into the coalition when the INC met in Kurdish-controlled northern Iraq. The INC appeared viable because it brought under one banner varying Iraqi ethnic groups and diverse political ideologies, including nationalists, ex-military officers, and defectors from Iraq’s ruling Baath Party. The Kurds provided the INC with a source of armed force and a presence on Iraqi territory. Its constituent groups publicly united around a platform that appeared to match U.S. values and interests, including human rights, democracy, pluralism, “federalism” (see below), the preservation of Iraq’s territorial integrity, and compliance with U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq.4 However, many observers doubted its commitment to democracy, because most of its groups have an authoritarian internal structure, and because of inherent tensions among its varied ethnic groups and ideologies. Ahmad Chalabi. Selected to chair the INC’s Executive Committee was Ahmad Chalabi, who is about 58 years old, a secular Shiite Muslim and U.S.- educated mathematician who had fled Iraq to Jordan in 1958, when the Hashemite monarchy was overthrown in a military coup. This coup occurred 10 years before the Baath Party took power in Iraq (July 1968). In 1978, he founded the Petra Bank in Jordan but later ran afoul of Jordanian authorities on charges of financial 3 Sciolino, Elaine. “Greater U.S. Effort Backed To Oust Iraqi.” New York Times, June 2, 1992. 4 The Iraqi National Congress and the International Community. Document provided by INC representatives, February 1993. CRS-3 malfeasance, and he left Jordan in 1989. Chalabi maintains that the Jordanian government was pressured by Iraq to turn against him, and he asserts that he has since rebuilt ties to the Jordanian government. He is said to be the favorite of those Administration officials, particularly in the Department of Defense, that have been the most supportive of changing Iraq’s regime by force. Chalabi does not appear to have a large following inside Iraq, although his popularity could grow if he is seen by anti-Saddam Iraqis as Washington’s candidate to head a post-war regime. On April 6, Chalabi and about 700 INC fighters were airlifted by the U.S. military from their base in the north to the Nasiriya area, purportedly to help stabilize civil affairs in southern Iraq. A prominent INC intellectual is Kanaan Makiya, who wrote a 1989 book “Republic of Fear: The Politics of Modern Iraq,” detailing alleged Iraqi regime human rights abuses. Makiya supports a Western-style democracy for Iraq, including full rights for women and Iraq’s minorities. A self-described atheist, he teaches Middle Eastern politics at Brandeis University. The Kurds/KDP and PUK. In committing to the concept of federalism, the INC platform assured the Kurds substantial autonomy within a post-Saddam Iraq, although some fear the Kurds might seek outright independence. Turkey, which has a sizable Kurdish population in the areas bordering northern Iraq, particularly fears that independence for Iraq’s Kurds would likely touch off an effort to unify into a broader “Kurdistan.” Iraq’s Kurds have been fighting intermittently for autonomy since their region was incorporated into the newly formed Iraqi state after World War I. In 1961, the KDP, then led by founder Mullah Mustafa Barzani, current KDP leader Masud Barzani’s father, began an insurgency that has continued until today, although interrupted by periods of autonomy negotiations with Baghdad. Masud Barzani’s brother, Idris, commanded Kurdish forces against Iraq during the Iran-Iraq war but was killed in that war. The PUK, headed by Jalal Talabani, split off from the KDP in 1965; the PUK’s members are generally more educated, urbane, and left- leaning than those of the KDP. Together, the PUK and KDP have about 40,000- 60,000 fighters, some of which are said to be increasingly well-trained in conventional military tactics. Ansar al-Islam. In the mid-1990s, the two main Kurdish parties enjoyed good relations with a small Kurdish Islamic faction, the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK), is headed by Shaykh Ali Abd-al Aziz. Based in Halabja, Iraq, the IMIK has publicized the effects of Baghdad’s March 1988 chemical attack on that city, and it allied with the PUK in 1998. A radical faction of the IMIK split off in 1998, calling itself the Jund al-Islam (Army of Islam). It later changed its name to Ansar al-Islam (Partisans of Islam). This faction, led by Mullah Krekar (who was detained in Europe in August 2002 and now lives in Norway), reportedly is associated with Al Qaeda and has hosted in its northern Iraq enclave Al Qaeda fighters who fled the U.S.-led war in Afghanistan. The leader of the Arab contingent within Ansar al-Islam is said by U.S. officials to be Abu Musab Zarqawi, an Arab of Jordanian origin who reputedly fought in Afghanistan. Zarqawi has been linked to Al Qaeda plots in Jordan during the millenium celebration, as well as to recent attempts to spread the biological agent ricin in London and possibly other places in Europe. Prior to Operation Iraqi CRS-4 Freedom, during which its base has been captured, about 8,000 people were in the Ansar al-Islam enclave, located near the town of Khurmal. This included about 600 fighters.5 Mullah Krekar reportedly studied under Shaykh Abdullah al-Azzam, an Islamic theologian of Palestinian origin who was the spiritual mentor of Osama bin Laden. Fighters of Ansar al-Islam clashed with the PUK around Halabja in December 2002, and Ansar gunmen were allegedly responsible for an assassination attempt against PUK prime minister Barham Salih in April 2002. In his presentation before the U.N. Security Council on February 5, 2003, Secretary of State Powell tied Zarqawi and Ansar al-Islam to the Iraqi regime, which might view Ansar al-Islam as a means of pressuring Baghdad’s Kurdish opponents, although many experts believe those links are tenuous or even non-existent. Some believe the Ansar enclave is supported by Iran. SCIRI/Badr Corps/Hakim Family. Some outside experts have concerns about the alliance between Iran and another INC component, the Iraqi Shiite Islamic fundamentalist group called the Supreme Council for the Islamic Revolution in Iraq (SCIRI). SCIRI was set up in 1982 to increase Iranian control over Shiite opposition groups in Iraq and the Persian Gulf states. SCIRI’s leader, Ayatollah Muhammad Baqr al-Hakim, was the late Ayatollah Khomeini’s choice to head an Islamic Republic of Iraq. Prior to the formation of SCIRI, Hakim and his family were leaders of the Da’wa (Islamic Call) Party, which allegedly was responsible for a May 1985 attempted assassination of the Amir of Kuwait and the December 1983 attacks on the U.S. and French embassies in Kuwait. The involvement of Hakim in that event, if any, is unclear. Mohammad Baqr is the son of the late Ayatollah Muhsin Al Hakim, who was a prominent Shiite leader in southern Iraq and an associate of Ayatollah Khomeini when Khomeini was in exile in southern Iraq during 1964-1978. Members of the Hizballah organization in Lebanon that held U.S. hostages in that country during the 1980s often linked release of the Americans to the release of 17 Da’wa Party prisoners held by Kuwait for those offenses. SCIRI has about 5,000 fighters organized into a “Badr Corps” (named after a major battle in early Islam) that conducts forays from Iran into southern Iraq to attack the Iraqi military and officials there. The Badr Corps is headed by Mohammad Baqr’s younger brother, Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim. (Another Hakim brother, Mahdi, was killed in Sudan in May 1990, allegedly by agents of Iraq’s security services.) Although Iran has improved relations with Iraq over the past few years, Iran’s Revolutionary Guard – which is politically aligned with Iran’s hard line civilian officials – reportedly continues to provide the Badr Corps with weapons and other assistance. However, many Iraqi Shiites view SCIRI as an Iranian creation and SCIRI/Badr Corps operations in southern Iraq prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom did not spark broad popular unrest against the Iraqi regime. SCIRI has periodically distanced itself from the INC. Until August 2002 when Abd al-Aziz al-Hakim joined other opposition figures for meetings in Washington, it had publicly refused to work openly with the United States or accept U.S. assistance. Press reports in late 2002 said that factions in Iran differ over whether SCIRI should be cooperating with the United States and that some Iranian factions are supporting rival Shiite Islamist 5 Chivers, C.J. New York Times, December 6, 2002. Repulsing Attack By Islamic Militants, “Iraqi Kurds Tell of Atrocities.” CRS-5 groups less inclined to work with Washington. In March 2003, it was reported by a number of press outlets that a few hundred Badr Brigade fighters are moving into the Kurdish controlled areas of northern Iraq, possibly to help seize territory if Saddam Hussein’s regime collapses at the hands of a U.S.-led offensive. Da’wa Party. The Da’wa Party continues to exist as a separate group, but it is allied with SCIRI. The party was founded in the 1960s by an Iraqi Shiite cleric, Ayatollah Mohammad Baqr Al Sadr, a like-minded associate of Ayatollah Khomeini. Baqr Al Sadr was hung by the Iraqi regime in 1980 for the Da’wa’s alleged responsibility in fomenting Shiite anti-regime unrest following Iran’s 1979 Islamic revolution. Its main spokesman is Ibrahim al-Jafari. Relations With Other Shiite Islamic Groups and Personalities. SCIRI is the dominant political faction in many cities of southern Iraq, but there are other centers of power in that area. One prominent cleric in Najaf, now under the control of U.S. forces, is Grand Ayatollah Ali al-Sistani. Now free of a long house arrest at the hands of Baghdad, he has a large following throughout the Shiite portions of Iraq. Another noteworthy leader is Abd al-Majid Khoi, the son of the late Grand Ayatollah Khoi. Abd al-Majid Khoi heads the Khoi Foundation, based in London, and he returned to Iraq after U.S.-led forces took Najaf. Grand Ayatollah Khoi did not accept the political doctrines of Ayatollah Khomeini of Iran, but the Khoi family has personal relations with the Hakim family, Ayatollah Sistani, and other prominent Iraqi Shiites. The Fragmentation of the Opposition The differences within the INC led to its near collapse in the mid-1990s. In May 1994, the KDP and the PUK began clashing with each other over territory, customs revenues levied at border with Turkey, and control over the Kurdish enclave’s government based in Irbil. The PUK lined up support from Iran while the KDP sought and received countervailing backing from its erstwhile nemesis, the Baghdad government. The infighting contributed to the defeat of an INC offensive against Iraqi troops in March 1995; the KDP pulled out of the offensive at the last minute. Although it was repelled, the offensive did initially overrun some of the less well-trained and poorly motivated Iraqi units on the front lines facing the Kurds. Some INC leaders have pointed to the battle as an indication that the INC could have succeeded militarily, without direct U.S. military help, had it been given additional resources and training in the 1990s. The Iraqi National Accord (INA). The infighting in the INC caused the United States to briefly revisit the “coup strategy” by renewing ties to a separate group, Iraq National Accord (INA).6 The INA, originally founded in 1990 with Saudi support, consists of military and security defectors who were perceived as having ties to disgruntled officials currently serving within their former organizations. It is headed by Dr. Iyad Alawi, former president of the Iraqi Student Union in Europe and 6 An account of this shift in U.S. strategy is essayed in Hoagland, Jim. “How CIA’s Secret War On Saddam Collapsed.” Washington Post, June 26, 1997. CRS-6 a physician by training. The INA’s prospects appeared to brighten in August 1995 when Saddam’s son-in-law Hussein Kamil al-Majid — architect of Iraq’s weapons of mass destruction programs — defected to Jordan, suggesting that Saddam’s grip on the military and security services was weakening. Jordan’s King Hussein agreed to allow the INA to operate from there. The INA became penetrated by Iraq’s intelligence services and, in June 1996, Baghdad dealt it a serious setback by arresting or executing over 100 INA sympathizers in the military. Prior to Operation Iraqi Freedom, Alawi claimed that the INA continued to operate throughout Iraq, and it apparently had rebuilt itself to some extent since the June 1996 arrests. However, it does not appear to have a large following in the Iraqi regime and has not announced any key defections from the regime since the start of Operation Iraqi Freedom. Although it has been cooperating with the INC at the start of the U.S.-led 2003 war, there is a history of friction between the two groups; the INA reportedly bombed an INC facility in northern Iraq in October 1995. Iraq’s counteroffensive against the opposition was completed two months after the arrests of the INA sympathizers. In late August 1996, the KDP asked Baghdad to provide armed support for its capture of Irbil from the rival PUK. Iraq took advantage of the request to strike against the INC base in Salahuddin, a city in northern Iraq, as well as against remaining INA operatives throughout northern Iraq. In the course of its incursion in the north, Iraq reportedly executed two hundred oppositionists and arrested as many as 2,000 others. The United States evacuated from northern Iraq and eventually resettled in the United States 650 oppositionists, mostly from the INC. Rebuilding an Opposition Strategy For the two years following the opposition’s 1996 setbacks, the Clinton Administration had little contact with the opposition. In those two years, the INC, INA, and other opposition groups attempted to rebuild their organizations and their ties to each other, although with mixed success. On February 26, 1998, then Secretary of State Madeleine Albright testified to a Senate Appropriations subcommittee that it would be “wrong to create false or unsustainable expectations” about what U.S. support for the opposition could accomplish. Iraq’s obstructions of U.N. weapons of mass destruction (WMD) inspections during 1997-1998 led to growing congressional calls for overthrowing Saddam Hussein. A formal congressional push for a regime change policy began with a FY1998 supplemental appropriation (P.L. 105-174, signed May 1, 1998) that, among other provisions, earmarked $5 million in Economic Support Funds (ESF) for the opposition and $5 million for a Radio Free Iraq, under the direction of Radio Free Europe/Radio Liberty (RFE/RL). The radio service began broadcasting in October 1998, from Prague. Of the ESF, $3 million was devoted to an overt program to coordinate and promote cohesion among the various opposition factions, and to highlighting Iraqi violations of U.N. resolutions. The remaining $2 million was used to translate and publicize documented evidence of alleged Iraqi war crimes; the documents were retrieved from the Kurdish north, placed on 176 CD-ROM diskettes, and translated and analyzed by experts under contract to the U.S. government. In CRS-7 subsequent years, Congress has appropriated funding for the Iraqi opposition and for war crimes issues, as shown in the appendix. Some of the war crimes funding has gone to the opposition-led INDICT (International Campaign to Indict Iraqi War Criminals) organization for publicizing Iraqi war crimes issues. Iraq Liberation Act The clearest indication of congressional support for a more active U.S. overthrow effort was encapsulated in another bill introduced in 1998 – the Iraq Liberation Act (ILA, H.R. 4655, P.L. 105-338, signed into law October 31, 1998). The ILA gave the President authority to provide up to $97 million in defense articles (and authorized $2 million in broadcasting funds) to opposition organizations to be designated by the Administration. The Act’s passage was widely interpreted as an expression of congressional support for the concept of promoting an insurgency by using U.S. air-power to expand opposition-controlled territory. This idea was advocated by INC executive director Ahmad Chalabi and some U.S. experts, such as General Wayne Downing. President Clinton signed the legislation despite reported widespread doubts within the Clinton Administration about the chances of success in promoting an opposition insurgency inside Iraq. The Iraq Liberation Act made the previously unstated policy of promoting regime change in Iraq official, declared policy. A provision of the ILA states that it should be the policy of the United States to “support efforts” to remove the regime headed by Saddam Hussein. In mid-November 1998, President Clinton publicly articulated that regime change was a component of U.S. policy toward Iraq. The signing of the ILA and the declaration of the overthrow policy came at the height of the one-year series of crises over U.N. weapons inspections in Iraq, in which inspections were repeatedly halted and restarted after mediation by the United Nations, Russia, and others. On December 15, 1998, U.N. inspectors were withdrawn for the final time, and a three-day U.S. and British bombing campaign against suspected Iraqi WMD facilities followed (Operation Desert Fox, December 160-19, 1998). (For information on these crises, see CRS Issue Brief IB92117, Iraq: Weapons Programs, Compliance, and U.S. Policy.) The First Eligibility Designations Under the ILA. Further steps to promote regime change followed Operation Desert Fox. In January 1999, career diplomat Frank Ricciardone was named as the State Department’s “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” – the chief liaison with the opposition. On February 5, 1999, after consultations with Congress, the President issued a determination (P.D. 99-13) that the following organizations would be eligible to receive U.S. military assistance under the Iraq Liberation Act: the INC; the INA; SCIRI; the KDP; the PUK; the Islamic Movement of Iraqi Kurdistan (IMIK); and the Movement for Constitutional Monarchy (MCM), which is led by Sharif Ali bin al-Hussein, a relative of the Hashemite monarchs that ruled Iraq from the end of World War I until 1958. The IMIK and the MCM, in particular, are considered small movements that cannot contribute much to an overthrow effort. Because of its possible role in contributing to the formation of Ansar al-Islam, the IMIK is no longer receiving U.S. support, although it has not formally been taken off the U.S. list of organizations eligible for assistance under the ILA. CRS-8 In May 1999, in concert with an INC visit to Washington, the Clinton Administration announced it would draw down $5 million worth of training and “non-lethal” defense equipment under the ILA. During 1999 - 2000, about 150 opposition members underwent civil administration training at Hurlburt air base in Florida, including attending Defense Department-run courses provided civil affairs training, including instruction in field medicine, logistics, computers, communications, broadcasting, power generation, and war crimes issues. However, the Clinton Administration asserted that the opposition was not sufficiently organized to merit U.S. provision of lethal military equipment or combat training. This restriction reflected divisions within and outside the Clinton Administration over the effectiveness and viability of the opposition, and over the potential for the United States to become militarily embroiled in civil conflict in Iraq. The trainees during 1999-2000 are not believed to have been brought into the Operation Iraqi Freedom effort against the regime. Continued Debate Over Policy During 1999-2000, U.S. efforts to rebuild and fund the opposition did not end the debate within the Clinton Administration over the regime change component of Iraq policy. In hearings and statements, several Members of both parties expressed disappointment with the Clinton Administration’s decision not to give the opposition lethal military aid or combat training. Many took those decisions as an indication that the Clinton Administration was skeptical that a renewed overthrow effort would fare better than previous attempts. Most of those who argued against increased U.S. support for the opposition maintained that the Iraqi opposition would not succeed unless backed by direct U.S. military involvement, and that direct U.S. military action was risky and not justified by the threat posed by Iraq. Some observers maintained that the potential threat from Saddam Hussein’s regime was sufficiently grave that direct U.S. military action should be taken. Other critics suggested the United States focus instead on rebuilding containment of Iraq by threatening force against Iraq in order to obtain re-entry into Iraq of the U.N. weapons of mass destruction inspectors that had been absent from Iraq since December 15, 1998. As a reflection of continued congressional support for the overthrow effort, a provision of the FY2001 foreign aid appropriation (H.R. 4811, P.L. 106-429, signed November 6, 2000) earmarked $25 million in ESF for “programs benefitting the Iraqi people,” of which at least: $12 million was for the INC to distribute humanitarian aid inside Iraq; $6 million was for INC broadcasting; and $2 million was for war crimes issues. According to the appropriation, the remaining $5 million could be used to provide additional ESF to the seven groups then eligible to receive assistance under the ILA. Taking note of congressional sentiment for INC distribution of aid inside Iraq, on September 29, 2000 the Clinton Administration reached agreement with the INC to provide the organization with $4 million in FY1999 ESF (one half the total earmark available) to develop an aid distribution plan and to gather information in Iraq on Iraqi war crimes. However, three days before it left office, the Clinton Administration issued a required report to Congress that noted that any INC effort to distribute aid in areas of Iraq under Baghdad’s control CRS-9 would be fraught with security risks to the INC, to Iraqi recipients of such aid, and to any relief distributors with which the INC contracts.7 Bush Administration Policy Bush Administration policy toward Iraq changed after the September 11 terrorist attacks, even though no hard evidence linking Iraq to those attacks has come to light. The shift toward a more assertive policy first became clear in President Bush’s State of the Union message on January 29, 2002, when he characterized Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with Iran and North Korea. Pre-September 11 Policy Throughout most of its first year, the Bush Administration continued the basic elements of Clinton Administration policy on Iraq. With no immediate consensus within the new Administration on how forcefully to proceed with an overthrow strategy, Secretary of State Powell focused on strengthening containment of Iraq, which the Bush Administration said had eroded substantially in the year prior to its taking office. Secretary Powell visited the Middle East in February 2001 to enlist regional support for a so-called “smart sanctions” plan – a modification of the U.N. sanctions regime to ensure that no weapons-related technology reaches Iraq. His plan offered to alter the U.N.-sponsored “oil-for-food” program by relaxing U.N. restrictions on exports to Iraq of civilian equipment and needed non-military technology.8 The United States asserted that this step would alleviate the suffering of the Iraqi people. Powell, who has sometimes openly expressed skepticism about the opposition’s prospects, barely raised the regime change issue during his trip or in his March 7, 2001 testimony before the House International Relations Committee, at which he was questioned about Iraq.9 After about a year of negotiations among the Security Council permanent members, the major feature of the smart sanctions plan – new procedures that virtually eliminate U.N. review of civilian exports to Iraq – was adopted on May 14, 2002 (U.N. Security Council Resolution 1409). Even though several senior officials had been strong advocates of a regime change policy, many of the questions about the wisdom and difficulty of that strategy that had faced previous administrations were debated early in the Bush Administration.10 Aside from restating the U.S. policy of regime change, the Bush Administration said and did little to promote that outcome throughout most of its first year. During his confirmation hearings as Deputy Secretary of Defense, a reported 7 U.S. Department of State. Washington File. “Clinton Sends Report on Iraq to Congress.” January 17, 2001. 8 For more information on this program, see CRS Report RL30472, Iraq: Oil For Food Program. 9 Perlez, Jane. “Powell Goes on the Road and Scores Some Points.” New York Times, March 2, 2001. 10 One account of Bush Administration internal debates on the strategy is found in, Hersh, Seymour. “The Debate Within.” The New Yorker, March 11, 2002. CRS-10 strong advocate of overthrow, Paul Wolfowitz, said that if there were a real option to overthrow Saddam Hussein, “I would think it was worthwhile,” although he also stated that he did not yet see a “plausible plan” for changing the regime. Like its predecessor, the Bush Administration declined to provide the opposition with lethal aid, combat training, or a commitment of direct U.S. military help. It eliminated the separate State Department position of “Coordinator for the Transition in Iraq,” further casting doubt on its enthusiasm for the overthrow strategy. On February 2, 2001, the Bush Administration confirmed that, shortly after President Bush took office, the Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (OFAC) granted the INC a license to proceed with information gathering inside Iraq only, and not actual distribution of humanitarian aid inside Iraq. This decision by the Administration amounted to a withholding of U.S. backing for the INC plan to rebuild its presence inside Iraq. Many in Congress, on the other hand, continue to support the INC as the primary vehicle for achieving regime change. Partly in deference to congressional sentiment, according to several observers, the Bush Administration continued to expand its ties to the INC despite doubts about its capabilities. In August 2001, the INC began satellite television broadcasts into Iraq, from London, called Liberty TV. The station was funded by the ESF aid appropriated by Congress, with start-up costs of $1 million and an estimated additional $2.7 million per year in operating costs.11 Policy Post-September 11 Bush Administration policy toward Iraq became notably more assertive after September 11, stressing regime change far more than containment. Almost immediately after the U.S.-led war on the Taliban and Al Qaeda in Afghanistan began in early October 2001, speculation began building that the Administration might try to change Iraq’s regime through direct use of military force as part of a “phase two” of the war on terrorism. As noted above, in his January 29, 2002 State of the Union message, President Bush named Iraq as part of an “axis of evil,” along with North Korea and Iran. Vice President Cheney visited the Middle East in March 2002 to consult regional countries about the possibility of confronting Iraq militarily, although the countries visited reportedly urged greater U.S. attention to the Arab- Israeli dispute rather than confrontation with Iraq. The two primary themes in the Bush Administration’s public case for confronting Iraq were (1) its refusal to verifiably end its WMD programs, and (2) its ties to terrorist groups, to which Iraq might transfer WMD for the purpose of conducting a catastrophic attack on the United States. Iraq and Al Qaeda. Some in the Administration do not discount the possibility that Iraq might have had a connection to the September 11 attacks or the subsequent anthrax mailings, although that does not appear to be a mainstream view in the Administration. Senior U.S. officials said in September 2002, and again in January and February 2003, that there is evidence of Iraqi linkages to Al Qaeda, although some observers have expressed skepticism about such connections because 11 Sipress, Alan. “U.S. Funds Satellite TV to Iraq.” Washington Post, August 16, 2001. CRS-11 of the ideological differences between Saddam Hussein’s secular regime and Al Qaeda’s Islamist character. Secretary of States Powell, as noted above, has cited intelligence information that Ansar al-Islam (see above for the origins of the group) has links to Saddam Hussein’s regime.12 Other senior officials cited intelligence information that Iraq has provided advice and training to Al Qaeda in the manufacture and use of chemical weapons, although Administration information appears to date to the early 1990s when Iraq was politically close to Sudan; bin Laden and Al Qaeda was based in Sudan during that time (1991-1996). On the other hand, Baghdad did not control northern Iraq even before Operation Iraqi Freedom, and some U.S. officials have played down this theory.13 Others note that Al Qaeda founder Osama bin Laden sought to raise an Islamic army to fight Saddam’s invasion of Kuwait in 1990, arguing against the need for U.S. troops, and that he is more an enemy of Saddam than a friend. In the Administration view, the two share similar anti-U.S. goals, which might outweigh ideological differences and propel them into tactical or strategic cooperation. Those differences were evident in a February 12, 2003 statement by bin Laden referring to Saddam Hussein’s regime as socialist and infidel, although the statement did express solidarity with Iraq on the eve of U.S. military action. WMD Threat Perception. In arguing for military action, U.S. officials maintained that Iraq’s purported commitment to developing WMD – coupled with its support for terrorist groups to which Iraq might transfer WMD – constituted an unacceptable potential threat to the United States and that major U.S. military action was justified if Iraq refused to disarm voluntarily. U.S. officials said the September 11, 2001 attacks demonstrated that the United States could not wait for threats to gather before acting, but must instead act preemptively or preventively. Senior U.S. officials asserted a WMD threat as follows: ! Iraq had worked to rebuild its WMD programs in the nearly 4 years since U.N. weapons inspectors left Iraq and had failed to comply with 17 U.N. resolutions, including Resolution 1441 (November 8, 2002), calling for its complete elimination of all WMD programs. However, statements by U.N. weapons inspectors after inspections beginning November 27, 2002 indicated they believe Iraq did not have an active nuclear weapons program, and that inspections on other weapons categories were making progress even without total Iraqi cooperation. ! Iraq has used chemical weapons against its own people (the Kurds) and against Iraq’s neighbors (Iran). The implication of this assertion is that Iraq would not necessarily be deterred from using WMD against the United States or its allies. Others note that Iraq has not used such weapons against adversaries, such as the United States, that have the capability of destroying Iraq’s government in 12 Goldberg, Jeffrey. “The Great Terror.” The New Yorker, March 25, 2002. 13 “U.S. Uncertain About Northern Iraq Group’s Link to Al Qaida.” Dow Jones Newswire, March 18, 2002. CRS-12 retaliation. Under the U.S. threat of massive retaliation, Iraq did not use WMD against U.S. troops in the 1991 Gulf war. On the other hand, Iraq defied U.S. warnings and did burn Kuwait’s oil fields. ! Iraq could transfer its WMD to terrorists such as Al Qaeda who could use these weapons to cause hundreds of thousands of deaths in the United States or elsewhere. Critics of the Administration cite presentations by CIA Director Tenet to Congress in late 2002, stating the CIA view that Iraq is likely to transfer WMD to terrorists if the United States were to attack Iraq. At that point, Saddam Hussein would be left with little incentive not to cooperate with terrorist groups capable of striking at U.S. interests. Broadening the Opposition. As it began in mid-2002 to prepare for possible military action to disarm Iraq and change its regime, the Administration tried to broaden the Iraqi opposition and build up its capabilities. On June 16, 2002, the Washington Post reported that, in early 2002, President Bush authorized stepped up covert activities by the CIA and special operations forces to destabilize Saddam Hussein. In early August 2002, the State and Defense Departments jointly invited six major opposition groups – the INC, the INA, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM – to Washington for meetings with senior officials, including a video link to Vice President Cheney. The meetings were held to show unity within the opposition and among different agencies of the U.S. government, which have tended to favor different opposition groups. In advance of the visit, the Defense Department agreed to fund the information gathering portion of the INC’s activities; the State Department had refused to fund those activities, which are conducted inside Iraq, because of strains between the INC and other opposition groups and questions about INC use of U.S. funds. On August 15, 2002, the State Department agreed to provide $8 million in ESF to the INC, funds that had been held up due to differences between the State Department and the INC over what activities would be funded. The $8 million was to be used to fund the INC, during May 2002 to December 2002, to run its offices in Washington, London, Tehran, Damascus, Prague, and Cairo, and to operate its Al Mutamar newspaper and Liberty TV. In addition, the Administration expanded its ties to Shiite Islamist groups and to groups composed of ex-military and security officers, as well as to some ethnic- based groups. On December 9, 2002, the Bush Administration added six of the factions discussed below (all except the Higher Council for National Salvation) to the list of “democratic opposition organizations” eligible to receive drawdowns under the ILA. The groups and individuals with which the Bush Administration had increasing contact include the following: ! Iraqi National Movement. It formed in 2001 as an offshoot of the INC. Its leaders include ex-senior military officer Hassan al-Naqib (who was part of an early leadership body of the INC); Hatim Mukhlis, who claims support of some in Saddam’s Tikriti clan; and ex-senior military officer Khalid al-Ubaydi. CRS-13 ! Iraqi National Front. Another grouping of ex-military officers, founded in March 2000 by Tawfiq al-Yasseri. Yasseri, a Shiite Muslim ex-military officer, headed Iraq’s military academy and participated and was wounded in the anti-Saddam uprisings immediately following the 1991 Gulf war. ! Iraqi Free Officers and Civilians Movement. Established in 1996 by ex-military officer Najib al-Salhi. This group works closely with the INC. Salhi defected in 1995 after serving as commander of several tank units in the Republican Guard and regular military. ! Higher Council for National Salvation. Based in Denmark, it was formally established on August 1, 2002. It is headed by Wafiq al- Samarra’i, a former head of Iraqi military intelligence. Ex-chief of staff of Iraq’s military (1980-1991) Nizar al-Khazraji, who was based in Denmark since fleeing Iraq in 1996, may also be a member. Khazraji was placed under travel restrictions by Danish officials in late November 2002 after saying he wanted to leave Denmark. He is under investigation there for alleged involvement in Iraq’s use of chemical weapons against the Kurds in 1988. Danish authorities said on March 17, 2003 that Khazraji had unexpectedly left his home there, raising questions about whether he is defying the travel restrictions placed on him. A press report on April 7, 2003 said he is now in Kuwait, possibly preparing, with U.S. help, to play a part in a post-Saddam regime there.14 ! Iraqi Turkmen Front. A small, ethnic Turkomen-based grouping, generally considered aligned with Turkish policy on Iraq. Turkomens number about 350,000 and live mainly in northern Iraq. ! The Islamic Accord of Iraq. Based in Damascus, this is another Shiite Islamic Party, but it is considered substantially less pro- Iranian than SCIRI or the Da’wa Party (see above), other Shiite Islamic parties with which the Administration has had contact. The Islamic Accord is headed by Jamil Wakil. Many Accord members are followers of Ayatollah Shirazi, an Iranian cleric who was the spiritual leader of a group called the Islamic Front for the Liberation of Bahrain (IFLB), which allegedly attempted to overthrow the government of Bahrain in the early 1980s. ! The Assyrian Democratic Movement, an ethnic-based movement headed by Secretary-General Yonadam Yousif Kanna. Iraq’s Assyrian community is based primarily in northern Iraq. There is a strong diaspora presence in the United States as well. After building ties to this group over the past year, the Bush Administration formally began incorporating the Assyrian Democratic Movement into its meetings with the Iraqi opposition in September 2002. 14 ‘Missing’ Iraqi General Now in Kuwait: Paper. Agence France Press, April 7, 2003. CRS-14 The Bush Administration applauded efforts over the past year by these groups to hold meetings to coordinate with each other and with the INC and other groups. One such meeting, in July 2002 in London and jointly run with the INC, attracted over 70 ex-military officers. Second ILA Designations. As the decision whether to launch military action approached, on December 9, 2002, President Bush issued a determination to draw down the remaining $92 million in defense articles and services authorized under the Iraq Liberation Act for the INA, the INC, the KDP, the PUK, SCIRI, and the MCM “and to such other Iraqi opposition groups designated by me under the Act before or after this determination.” This latter phrase suggested that some of the draw downs would go to the six groups designated above as eligible to receive ILA draw downs. The announcement appeared to be part of reported plan to train about 5,000 oppositionists in tasks that could assist U.S. forces, possibly including combat units.15 An initial group of 3,000 was been selected, but only about 70 oppositionists completed training at an air base (Taszar) in Hungary, according to press reports.16 These oppositionists are with U.S. forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, serving as translators and mediators between U.S. forces and local leaders. As the prospects for military action against Iraq grew, the opposition began planning its role in the war and the post-war period. During December 14-17, 2002, with U.S. officials attending, major Iraqi opposition groups held a conference in London. In advance of the meeting, the Bush Administration appointed NSC official Zalmay Khalilzad to be a liaison to the Iraqi opposition. The conference was organized by the same six groups whose leaders visited Washington in August 2002, but included other groups as well, and they discussed whether the opposition should declare a provisional government. The Administration opposed that step on the grounds that it was premature and would give the impression that outside powers are determining Iraq’s political structure. The meeting ended with agreement to form a 65-member follow-up committee, which some criticized as weighted heavily toward Shiite Islamist groups such as SCIRI. The opposition met again during February 24-27, 2003 in northern Iraq. Against the urging of U.S. representatives at the meeting, the opposition agreed to form a six man committee that would prepare for a transition regime, although it stopped short of declaring a provisional government. The six included PUK leader Jalal Talabani, KDP leader Masud Barzani, SCIRI leader Mohammad Baqr Al Hakim, Chalabi, INA leader Iyad Alawi, and a former Iraqi foreign minister Adnan Pachachi. Iran allowed Iraqi oppositionists to cross from Iran into northern Iraq to hold that session. Decision to Take Military Action. As inspectors worked in Iraq under the new mandates provided in Resolution 1441, the Administration demanded complete disarmament and full cooperation by Iraq if Iraq wanted to avert military action. The 15 Deyoung, Karen, and Daniel Williams. “Training of Iraqi Exiles Authorized.” Washington Post, October 19, 2002. 16 Williams, Daniel. U.S. Army to Train 1,000 Iraqi Exiles. Washington Post, December 18, 2002. CRS-15 Administration had been downplaying the goal of regime change after President Bush’s September 12, 2002 speech before the United Nations General Assembly, in which he focused on enforcing U.N. resolutions that require Iraqi disarmament. However, the Administration resumed stressing the regime change goal after February 2002 as diplomacy at the United Nations ran its course. In the Administration view, a friendly government in Baghdad was required if the international community is to rid Iraq of WMD and links to terrorist groups. The possibility of war became clearer following the mid-March breakdown of U.N. diplomacy over whether or not the U.N. Security Council should authorize war against Iraq for failing to comply with Resolution 1441. The diplomatic breakdown followed several briefings for the U.N. Security Council by the director of the U.N. inspection body UNMOVIC (U.N. Monitoring, Verification, and Inspection Commission) Hans Blix and the director of the International Atomic Energy Agency (IAEA), most recently on March 7, 2003. The briefings were generally critical of Iraq for failing to pro-actively cooperate to clear up outstanding questions about Iraq’s WMD program, but the latter two briefings (February 24 and March 7) noted progress in clearing up outstanding WMD questions. Security Council opponents of war, including France, Russia, China, and Germany, said the briefings indicated that Iraq could be disarmed peacefully and that inspections should be given more time. The United States, Britain, Spain, and Bulgaria disagreed, maintaining that Iraq had not fundamentally decided to disarm, and would continue only to try to divide the Council and avert war, while preserving WMD capabilities. The Administration asserted on March 17, 2003, that diplomatic options to disarm Iraq peacefully had failed and reportedly began turning its attention to military action. That evening, President Bush gave Saddam Hussein and his sons, Uday and Qusay, an ultimatum to leave Iraq within 48 hours to avoid war. They refused the ultimatum, and Operation Iraqi Freedom was launched on March 19. Assessments of the War. A major issue in the military planning debate was over whether Iraq’s military would quickly unravel or rebel against Saddam Hussein in the face of U.S. military action or whether it would fight hard to defend the regime. Some maintained that Iraqi forces would likely defect or surrender in large numbers, as happened in the 1991 Gulf war, when faced with a militarily superior force. Others contrasted the current situation with the 1991 war and argue that Iraqi forces would hold together and fight fiercely because they are defending Iraq itself, not an occupation of Kuwait. Some believed the Iraqi military would quickly retreat into urban areas and hope to inflict large numbers of casualties on American forces. Although Iraq’s conventional military forces have been overwhelmed by U.S. and British forces in Operation Iraqi Freedom, the regime did not quickly collapse and, at times, put up stiff resistance using unconventional tactics. No major Iraqi military commanders or political figures have come forward to work with U.S. or British forces to establish a post-Saddam government. The intensity of any post-war debate on the wisdom and justification for the war might depend on its military and political outcome. Factors such as the number of U.S. casualties, post-war humanitarian conditions, the degree of resistance to a U.S. and British occupation, and whether a new government is democratic, will likely be factors considered. Some analysts had thought the Administration would decide not CRS-16 to use military force to change Iraq’s regime or reduce its WMD capabilities. Some Members of Congress, some outside experts, and reportedly many senior military leaders believed Iraq was well contained by sanctions and the U.S./British enforced no-fly zones and that, as long as Iraq continued to allow access to U.N. weapons inspections under Resolution 1441, Iraq could not pose an immediate threat to U.S. national security. Inspections encountered few, if any, Iraqi obstructions in about 700 inspections of about 400 different sites, as of mid-March 2003. Others believed that, even if Iraq were to acquire major new WMD capabilities, Iraq could have been deterred by U.S. overall strategic superiority, presumably including the U.S. nuclear arsenal. Post-War Governance Issues As U.S. forces have reached Baghdad, there is increasing debate about governing post-war Iraq. The same U.S. concerns about fragmentation of and instability in Iraq that existed in prior years are present in the current debate over regime change. Although some Iraqi civilians have welcomed U.S. and British troops in areas captured, resistance has been stiffer than expected, raising questions about the stability of Iraq in the post-war period. Some believe that U.S. occupation forces might face protracted guerrilla attacks from remnants of the Iraqi military, possibly fighting alongside Iraqi civilians against U.S. forces. Others say U.S. forces might become caught in the crossfire among ethnic and political factions that might fight each other for power in post-war Iraq. Other experts fear that a post-war Iraq will inevitably fall under control of SCIRI and other Shiite Islamist forces who are the best-organized opponents of the Iraqi regime. Shiites constitute about 60% of Iraq’s population but have traditionally been under-represented in Iraq’s Sunni Muslim-dominated government. The Administration asserts that it will do what is necessary to bring about a stable, democratic successor regime that complies with all applicable U.N. resolutions. In press interviews on April 6, 2003, Deputy Secretary of Defense Paul Wolfowitz indicated that the Administration is hoping to turn post-war governance over to an Iraqi interim administration within six months. Experts note that all projections, including the duration of the U.S. military occupation and the numbers of occupation troops, could be determined by the amount of Iraqi resistance and U.S. casualties. The Chief of Staff of the Army, General Eric Shinseki, told the Senate Armed Services Committee on February 24 that as many as 200,000 U.S. troops might be needed for a postwar occupation, although other Administration officials, including Wolfowitz, have disputed the Shinseki assessment. Under occupation plans formulated before hostilities began, U.S. officials said that Lt. Gen. Jay Garner (ret.) is expected to direct U.S. civilian occupation forces, which are to include U.S. diplomats and other U.S. government personnel serving as advisers and administrators in Iraq’s various ministries. He heads the Office of Reconstruction and Humanitarian Assistance, within the Department of Defense, created by a January 20, 2003 executive order. He and most of his staff have deployed to Kuwait in preparation to later take up positions in post-war Iraq. During the interim period, the United States would eliminate remaining WMD, eliminate CRS-17 terrorist cells in Iraq, begin economic reconstruction, and purge Baath Party leaders. Iraq’s oil industry would also be rebuilt and upgraded. The exact nature of post-war governance might depend on the outcome of a discussion between the United States and its European allies over a U.N. role in post- war Iraq, which will also be the focus of President Bush’s meeting in Belfast with British Prime Minister Blair on April 7. Britain and most European countries believe that the Iraqi people would more easily accommodate to a U.N.- administered post- war Iraq. Senior U.S. officials, with the reported exception of Secretary of State Powell, want to keep the U.N. role limited to humanitarian relief and economic reconstruction, reserving most decisions about a post-war Iraqi power structure to the United States and Britain. U.S. officials say they would support a new U.N. Security Council resolution that would endorse a new government, and, with U.S. support, Secretary-General Annan said on April 7 that he was appointing a U.N. coordinator, Pakistani diplomat Rafeuddin Ahmedm, to run U.N. operations in Iraq. However, U.S. officials note that some of the countries that opposed the war might object to adopting a resolution that they believe might legitimize a U.S.-British occupation. Iraqi Interim Administration? The exiled Iraqi opposition, including those groups most closely associated with the United States, generally opposes a major role for U.S. officials in running a post-war Iraqi government. The opposition groups assert that Iraqis are sufficiently competent and unified to rebuild Iraq after a war with the United States. The opposition groups that have been active over the past few years, such as the Iraqi National Congress, believe that they are entitled to govern post-Saddam Iraq, and fear that the Administration might hand too much power to those who have been part of the current regime. Although the Administration asserts that it wants Iraqis who stayed in Iraq and were not part of the exiled opposition to participate in a new power structure, the U.S. military airlifted about 700 opposition fighters, led by Chalabi, into the Nasiriyah area on April 6. The opposition fighters are to begin stabilizing areas of southern Iraq that have been captured by U.S.-led forces. Some analysts believe that the insertion of Chalabi into the war effort could represent a U.S. effort to promote him as a possible head of an Iraqi interim administration. As part of the post-war planning process, the U.S. State Department and the Defense Department have supported groups of Iraqi exiles in planning to address issues that will confront a successor government.17 It is not yet known what influence, if any, these working groups will have on any post-war regime decision- making in Iraq. As part of the post-war planning process, the U.S. State Department ran a $5 million “Future of Iraq” project in which Iraqi exiles are meeting in working groups to address issues that will confront a successor government. The working groups in phase one of the project have discussed (1) transitional justice; (2) public finance; (3) public and media outreach; (4) democratic principles; (5) water, agriculture, and the environment; (6) health and human services; and (7) economy and infrastructure. Phase two, which reportedly will begin soon, includes working groups on (1) education; (2) refugees, internally-displaced persons, and migration 17 “State Department Hosts Working Group Meeting for Future of Iraq Project,” Washington File, December 11, 2002. CRS-18 policy; (3) foreign and national security policy; (4) defense institutions and policy; (5) free media; (6) civil society capacity-building; (7) anti-corruption measures; and (8) oil and energy. Reconstruction and Oil Industry Issues. It is widely assumed that Iraq’s vast oil reserves, believed second only to those of Saudi Arabia, would be used to fund reconstruction. Presidential spokesman Ari Fleischer said on February 18, 2003, referring to Iraq’s oil reserves, that Iraq has “a variety of means ... to shoulder much of the burden for [its] own reconstruction.” Many observers have been concerned that an Iraqi regime on the verge of defeat could destroy its own oil fields. Iraq set Kuwait’s oil fields afire before withdrawing from there in 1991, but coalition forces say they have secured Iraq’s southern oil fields since combat began on March 19, 2003. Only about 9 oil wells were set on fire, of a total of over 500 oil fields in that region, and virtually all have now been put out. The northern oil fields in Kirkuk and Mosul have not yet been captured by coalition forces, but there are no reports any are afire in those areas. There is a debate within the Administration over how direct will be the U.S. participation in running Iraq’s oil industry during the occupation period. The outcome of that issue might hinge on the character of U.N. involvement in post-war Iraq. A related issue is long-term development of Iraq’s oil industry and which foreign energy firms, if any, might receive preference for contracts to explore Iraq’s vast reserves. Russia, China, and others are said to fear that the United States will seek to develop Iraq’s oil industry with minimal participation of firms from other countries. Some press reports suggest the Administration is planning to exert such control,18 although some observers speculate that the Administration had sought to create such an impression in order to persuade Russia to support use of force against Iraq. Continuation of the Oil-for-Food Program. About 60% of Iraqis receive all their foodstuffs from the U.N.-supervised Oil-for-Food Program. The program, which is an exception to the comprehensive U.N. embargo on Iraq put in place after the 1991 Persian Gulf war, began operations in December 1996. It was suspended just before hostilities began, when U.N. staff in Iraq that run the various aspects of the program departed Iraq. As of March 14, 2003, about $9 billion worth of humanitarian goods were in the process of being delivered or in production. On March 28, 2003, the U.N. Security Council unanimously adopted Resolution 1472 that restarts the program’s operations and empowers the United Nations, for a 45-day period, to take direct control of all aspects of the program. Under the new resolution, the United Nations is to set priorities for and direct the delivery of already contracted supplies. The Bush Administration envisions that a post-war Iraqi interim administration would reassume those functions from U.N. staff when an interim administration is in place and able to perform these duties. Press reports on March 27, 2003 said that British forces in southern Iraq were talking with Iraqi oil workers to try to get them to return to work in Iraq’s oil industry. Coalition forces also announced in late March that they would soon restart a major oil refinery near Basra. 18 “After Saddam, an Uncertain Future,” Insight Magazine, February 3, 2003. CRS-19 There reportedly are still some Iraqi oil exports via Turkey, and the proceeds of these sales continue to be deposited into the U.N. escrow account. No Iraqi oil is flowing from the Gulf outlet at this time. War Crimes. An issue related to regime change but somewhat separate is whether Saddam Hussein and his associates should be prosecuted for war crimes and crimes against humanity. The Administration reportedly has decided that he and his inner circle would be tried in Iraq if they are captured. The Administration has been gathering data for a potential trial of Saddam and 12 of his associates. Those reportedly to be sought for trial include Saddam; his two sons Uday and Qusay; Ali Hassan al-Majid, for alleged use of chemicals against the Kurds (he was reported by British officers to have died in an early April air strike on his home in Basra); Muhammad Hamza al-Zubaydi; Taha Yasin Ramadan; first Vice President and number three in the regime; Izzat Ibrahim, Vice Chairman of the Revolutionary Command Council and formally number two in the regime; Barzan al-Tikriti, Saddam’s half brother; Watban al-Tikriti and Sabawi al-Tikriti, both other half brothers of Saddam and former leaders of regime intelligence bureaus; Tariq Aziz, deputy Prime Minister and foremost regime spokesman; and Aziz Salih Noman, governor of Kuwait during Iraq’s occupation of that country. The war crimes issue has been addressed by previous U.S. administrations and the international community. U.N. Security Council Resolution 674 (October 29, 1990) calls on all states or organizations to provide information on Iraq’s war-related atrocities to the United Nations. The Foreign Relations Authorization Act for FY1992 (P.L. 102-138, October 28, 1991, Section 301) stated the sense of Congress that the President should propose to the U.N. Security Council a war crimes tribunal for Saddam Hussein. Similar legislation was later passed, including H.Con.Res. 137 (passed the House November 13, 1997); S.Con.Res. 78 (passed the Senate March 13, 1998); and a provision of the Iraq Liberation Act (P.L. 105-338, signed October 31, 1998). A U.S. Army report on possible war crimes was released on March 19, 1993, after Clinton took office. Since April 1997, the Administration has supported INDICT, a private organization that publicizes alleged Iraqi war crimes and seeks the arrest of 12 alleged Iraqi war criminals, including Saddam and his two sons. Although apparently lacking international support, in August 2000 then U.S. Ambassador-At-Large for War Crimes David Scheffer said that the United States wanted to see an Iraq war crimes tribunal established, focusing on “nine major criminal episodes.” These include the use of chemical weapons against Kurdish civilians at Halabja (March 16, 1988, killing 5,000 Kurds) and the forced relocation of Kurds in the “Anfal” campaign (February 1988, in which an estimated 50,000 to 182,000 Kurds died); the use of chemical weapons against Iran; post-war crimes against humanity (the Kurds and the Marsh Arabs); war crimes against Kuwait (including oil field fires) and coalition forces; and other allegations. In FY2001 and again in FY2002, the State Department contributed $4 million to a U.N. “Iraq War Crimes Commission,” to be spent if a U.N. tribunal for Iraq war crimes is formed. CRS-20 Congressional Reactions Congress, like the Administration, appears to have had divergent views on the mechanisms for promoting regime change, although there appears to be widespread agreement in Congress that regime change is desirable and an appropriate U.S. policy. However, there was substantial disagreement over whether a major military offensive is the most desirable option for achieving that objective. On December 20, 2001, the House passed H.J.Res. 75, by a vote of 392-12, calling Iraq’s refusal to readmit U.N. weapons inspectors a “mounting threat” to the United States. The resolution did not call for new U.S. steps to overthrow Saddam Hussein but a few Members called for the overthrow of Saddam Hussein in their floor statements in support of the resolution. In early 2002, prior to the intensified speculation about possible war with Iraq, some Members expressed support for increased aid to the opposition. In a joint appearance with Senate Foreign Relations Committee Chairman Joseph Biden on Cable News Network on February 17, 2002, House International Relations Committee Chairman Henry Hyde said that “...supporting the underground, the opposition, the internal opposition, is to me the procedure of choice. That is an option that is being worked on. All of these options are under consideration.” In early December 2001, a bipartisan group of nine Members – Senators John McCain, Jesse Helms, Richard Shelby, Sam Brownback, Joseph Lieberman, and Trent Lott and Representatives Henry Hyde, Benjamin Gilman, and Harold Ford Jr. – wrote to President Bush to urge that U.S. assistance be provided to the INC for operations inside Iraq itself. According to the letter, Despite the express wishes of the Congress, the INC has been denied U.S. assistance for any operations inside any part of Iraq, including liberated Kurdish areas. Instead, successive Administrations have funded conferences, offices and other intellectual exercises that have done little more than expose the INC to accusations of being “limousine insurgents” and “armchair guerrillas.” As discussion of potential military action increased in the fall of 2002, Members debated the costs and risks of an all-out U.S. effort to achieve that result. Congress adopted H.J.Res. 114, authorizing the President to use military force against Iraq if he determines that doing so is in the national interest and will enforce U.N. Security Council resolutions on Iraq. The measure passed the House on October 11, 2002 by a vote of 296-133, and the Senate the following day by a vote of 77-23. The legislation was signed into law on October 16, 2002 (P.L. 107-243). The 108th Congress was sworn in on January 7, 2003. It has held some hearings on issues of post-war reconstruction and the effects of a war on the Middle East region as a whole, as well as the likely costs of the fighting and reconstruction. Some Members have made floor statements and given speeches and press conferences to state their views on whether force should be used to obtain Iraq’s disarmament. CRS-21 Appendix. U.S. Assistance to the Opposition Appropriated Economic Support Funds (E.S.F.) to the Opposition (Figures in millions of dollars) INC War Crimes Broadcasting Unspecified Opposition Activities Total FY 1998 (P.L. 105-174) 2.0 5.0 (RFE/RL) 3.0 10.0 FY 1999 (P.L. 105-277) 3.0 3.0 2.0 8.0 FY 2000 (P.L. 106-113) 2.0 8.0 10.0 FY 2001 (P.L. 106-429) 12.0 (aid distribution inside Iraq) 2.0 6.0 (INC radio) 5.0 25.0 FY 2002 (P.L. 107-115) 25.0 25.0 Total, FY1998- FY 2002 15.0 9.0 11.0 43.0 78.0 FY2003 (no earmark) 10.0 (allocated) 10.0 FY2004 (request) 0 0 Notes: The figures above do not include defense articles and services provided under the Iraq Liberation Act. During FY1999-FY2000, approximately $5 million worth of services, out of the $97 million authorized by the Act, was obligated to the opposition, and $1 million of that has been spent, as of late December 2002. The figures provided above also do not include any covert aid provided, the amounts of which are not known from open sources. In addition, during each of FY2001 and FY2002, the Administration has donated $4 million to a “U.N. War Crimes Commission” fund, to be used if a war crimes tribunal is formed. Those funds were drawn from U.S. contributions to U.N. programs.